3G Optimization Referance

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference
Page 1 of 205

Purpose
This document describes the configurable parameters in network optimization and offers the meaning, value range, impact, and configuration command of each
parameter.
NOTE:
This guide offers not all but some of the network parameters.
Related Versions
The following table lists the versions of the product described in the document.
Product Name
Version
RNC
V200R010
NodeB
V200R010
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
Network planners
Field engineers
System engineers
Update History
Refer to Changes in RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference.
Organization
Power Control Parameters

This describes power control parameters. Power control parameters are categorized into uplink power control parameters and downlink power control
parameters.
Handover Parameters
This describes handover parameters. Handover aims to ensure the communication continuity and quality. Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following
types: soft handover, softer handover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard handover, and so on. Handover emerges
as an important factor affecting network performance, and handover optimization is also significant in the network optimization. Handover parameters are
classified according to handover classifications.
Admission Control Parameters
This describes the admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Load Control Parameters
This describes the load control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
PS Service Rate Control Parameters
This describes the PS service rate control parameters: the service-related thresholds, DCCC parameters, link stability parameters, state transfer parameters, PS
active parameters, and so on.
Miscellaneous Topic Parameters
This describes the special topic parameters, including parameters for cell channel power distribution, paging, RRC connection setup, synchronization, and
location updating.
HSDPA Parameters
This describes HSDPA parameters as follows: HSDPA power resource management parameters, HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters,
HSDPA mobility management parameters, HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call admission control algorithm
parameters.
HSUPA Parameters
This describes the HSUPA parameters: HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and HSUPA admission control
parameters.
MBMS Parameters
This describes MBMS parameters. MBMS parameters are MBMS admission parameters, MBMS preemption parameters, and FLC/FLD algorithm parameters.
Algorithm Switches
This describes the RNC algorithm Switches. In the RNC, algorithm switches are categorized into connection-oriented algorithm switches and cell-oriented
algorithm switches.
Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT
This describes the parameters that can be configured on the NodeB LMT: the HSDPA flow control parameters, HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm
parameters, HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and local cell management parameters.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Power Control Parameters

This describes power control parameters. Power control parameters are categorized into uplink power control parameters and downlink power control parameters.
Uplink Power Control Parameters

This describes the uplink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
file:///C:/Users/enachau/AppData/Local/Temp/~hh6693.htm
7/18/2011
Page 2 of 205
Downlink Power Control Parameters

This describes the downlink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Parent topic: RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Uplink Power Control Parameters

This describes the uplink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of uplink power control parameters
Serial ID
No.
Meaning
PowerOffsetPpm
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
The parameter is the offset between the power Signaling: 3 dB;

of the last access preamble and power of the
services: 2 dB
message control part (the power of the message
control part equals the power of the access
preamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm)
Set: ADD PRACHTFC
Cell
Set: ADD PRACHBASIC
ConstantValue
Constant value used by a UE to calculate the

initial transmit power of the PRACH on the
basis of the open loop power
20, namely 20
dB
PowerRampStep
Step of the power increase for the preamble

when a UE does not receive the acquisition
indication (AI) from the NodeB
2, namely 2 dB
PreambleRetransMax
Maximum number of attempts of

retransmitting the preamble in a preamble
ramp period
Mmax
Maximum number of preamble loops
To modify PowerOffsetPpm, delete the PRACH,

and then reconfigure the transport format
information set (TFCS) of the PRACH.
Cell
To modify ConstantValue, delete the PRACH, and

then reconfigure the transport format information set
(TFCS) of the PRACH.
Set: ADD RACH
Cell
Query: LST RACH

Modify: MOD RACH
6
DefaultConstantValue
Constant value used to calculate the initial TX

power of the uplink DPCCH
22, namely -22

dB
Set or modify: SET FRC
RNC
Query: LST FRC

7
MaxAllowedUlTxPower Maximum uplink TX power of a UE

MaxUlTxPowerForConv
The default value

is 24, namely 24
dBm.
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST

CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD
CELLSELRESEL to modify
MaxAllowedUlTxPower.
Cell
MaxUlTxPowerForStr
MaxUlTxPowerForInt
MaxUlTxPowerForBac
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, use LST CELLCAC

to query, and use MOD CELLCAC to modify
MaxULTxPowerForConv,
MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxULTxPowerForInt,
and MaxULTxPowerForBac.
Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part

This describes the power offset (PowerOffsetPpm) between the last access preamble and the message control part. The power of the message control part
equals the power of the access preamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm.
Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power
This describes the constant value used by a UE to calculate the initial transmit power of the PRACH on the basis of the open loop power.
PRACH Power Ramp Step
This describes the step of the power increase for the preamble when a UE does not receive the Acquisition Indication (AI) from the NodeB.
Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts
This describes the maximum number of attempts of retransmitting the preamble in a preamble ramp period.
Maximum Preamble Loop
This describes the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE has transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission
times has reached PreambleRetransMax, it repeats the access attempt after the specified waiting time, if the UE still has not received the capture indication.
The maximum number of cycles cannot exceed Mmax.
Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power
This describes the default constant value (DefaultConstantValue) that is used by a UE in the open loop power control process to calculate the power offset of
the DPCCH (DPCCH_Power_offset) and accordingly calculate the initial transmit power of the uplink DPCCH.
Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power
This describes the maximum transmit power of the PRACH when a UE is trying to access a designated cell. The parameter (MaxAllowedUlTxPower) equals
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the cell selection rule. In addition, there are another four parameters indicating the maximum transmit power of UEs, and the
four parameters are intended for different QoS services.
Parent topic: Power Control Parameters

Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part
7/18/2011
Page 3 of 205
This describes the power offset (PowerOffsetPpm) between the last access preamble and the message control part. The power of the message control part equals the
power of the access preamble plus the value of PowerOffsetPpm.
ID
PowerOffsetPpm
Value Range
5 to 10
Physical Scope
5 dB to 10 dB, with the step of 1 dB
Setting
In signaling transmission mode, set PowerOffsetPpm to 3; in service transmission mode, set PowerOffsetPpm to 2.
Impact on the Network Performance
If PowerOffsetPpm is excessively high, the signaling messages and service messages that the RACH bears may not be normally received by the UTRAN, and
the uplink coverage may be affected.
If PowerOffsetPpm is excessively low, the uplink interference may increase, and the uplink capacity may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHTFC to set PowerOffsetPpm. To modify PowerOffsetPpm, use RMV PRACHTFC to delete the TFC of the PRACH, and then reconfigure the
TFC of the PRACH. Before using RMV PRACHTFC, use DEA PRACH to deactivate the PRACH and DEA CELL to deactivate the cells.
Parent topic: Uplink Power Control Parameters
Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power

This describes the constant value used by a UE to calculate the initial transmit power of the PRACH on the basis of the open loop power.
ID
ConstantValue
Value Range
35 to 10
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of ConstantValue is 20, namely 20 dB.
The constant value is used by a UE in the random access process to calculate the initial transmit power of the PRACH on the basis of the open loop power. The
formula for calculating the initial transmit power is as follows: Preamble_Initial_Power = Primary CPICH DL TX power-CPICH_RSCP + UL interference +
Constant Value.
Where,
Preamble_Initial_Power is the preamble initial transmit power;

Primary CPICH DL TX power is the downlink transmit power of the PCPICH;
CPICH_RSCP is the received signal code power of the PCPICH measured by UEs;
UL_interference is the uplink interference, which is received by UEs from the BCH;
Constant_Value is the constant value received by UEs from the BCH.
If ConstantValue is excessively high, the initial transmit power becomes excessively high, and the period of the access process is shortened.
If ConstantValue is excessively low, the transmit power during the access process can meet the requirement, but the preamble needs to ramp for many times,
and thus the period of the access process increases.
Because the RACH has short periods of preamble power ramp and retransmission, the value of ConstantValue has a comparatively small impact on the system
access performance.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set and MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify ConstantValue.
7/18/2011
Page 4 of 205

PRACH Power Ramp Step

This describes the step of the power increase for the preamble when a UE does not receive the Acquisition Indication (AI) from the NodeB.
ID
PowerRampStep
Value Range
1 to 8
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of PowerRampStep is 2, namely 2 dBm.
If PowerRampStep is excessively high, the access process is shortened, whereas the power cost may increase.
If PowerRampStep is excessively low, the access process becomes longer, but the power cost is reduced.
In addition, the higher PowerRampStep is, the smaller impact ConstantValue has on the network performance.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set, MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify, and LST PRACH to query PowerRampStep.
Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts

This describes the maximum number of attempts of retransmitting the preamble in a preamble ramp period.
ID
PreambleRetransMax
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
1 to 64 attempts, with the step of 1 attempt
Setting
The default value of PreambleRetransMax is 8.
The product of PreambleRetransMax and PRACH Power Ramp Step determines the maximum ramp power of the UE within a preamble ramp period.
If PreambleRetransMax is excessively low, the preamble power cannot ramp to the required value, and UEs cannot successfully access the network.
If PreambleRetransMax is excessively high, some UEs may continuously increase the power and repeatedly try to access the network, and thus other UEs are
affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD PRACHBASIC to set, MOD PRACHUUPARAS to modify, and LST PRACH to query PreambleRetransMax.
Maximum Preamble Loop
7/18/2011
Page 5 of 205
This describes the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE has transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has
reached PreambleRetransMax, it repeats the access attempt after the specified waiting time, if the UE still has not received the capture indication. The maximum
number of cycles cannot exceed Mmax.
ID
Mmax
Value Range
1 to 32
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is 8.
If Mmax is excessively low, the UE access success rate is affected.

If Mmax is excessively high, the UE probably tries the access attempt repeatedly within a long time, which increases the uplink interference.
Related Commands
Use ADD RACH to set, LST RACH to query, and MOD RACH to modify Mmax.
Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power

This describes the default constant value (DefaultConstantValue) that is used by a UE in the open loop power control process to calculate the power offset of the
DPCCH (DPCCH_Power_offset) and accordingly calculate the initial transmit power of the uplink DPCCH.
ID
DefaultConstantValue
Value Range
-35 to -10
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DefaultConstantValue is 22, namely 22 dB.
In 3GPP 25.331, the formula for calculating the initial transmit power of the DPCCH is as follows:
DPCCH_Initial_power = DPCCH_Power_offset CPICH_RSCP. Where, the value of CPICH_RSCP is measured by UEs.
In 3GPP 25.331, the formula for calculating the initial transmit power of the PRACH or PCPCH preamble is as follows:
Preamble_initial_Power = Primary CPICH DL TX Power CPICH RSCP + UL Interference + Constant Value. Where, Primary CPICH DL TX Power (SIB5) and
UL Interference (SIB7) are broadcasted in system messages.
By comparison of the preceding formulas, you can find that DPCCH_Power_offset = Primary CPICH DL TX Power + UL Interference + Constant Value. Where,
Constant Value equals DefaultConstantValue, namely the target of the DPCCH preamble (Ec/N0_Target). Considering that the step of DPCCH_Power_offset is 2
dB, the accuracy of DefaultConstantValue is not strictly required. The uplink synchronization, however, requires a high value of DefaultConstantValue.
If DefaultConstantValue is excessively low, the uplink synchronization at cell verges may fail in the initial link setup process, and the uplink coverage is
affected.
If DefaultConstantValue is excessively high, instantaneous interference may be caused for the uplink reception.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query DefaultConstantValue.
7/18/2011
Page 6 of 205
Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power

This describes the maximum transmit power of the PRACH when a UE is trying to access a designated cell. The parameter (MaxAllowedUlTxPower) equals
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the cell selection rule. In addition, there are another four parameters indicating the maximum transmit power of UEs, and the four
parameters are intended for different QoS services.
ID
MaxAllowedUlTxPower
MaxUlTxPowerForConv (maximum transmit power of the conversational service)
MaxUlTxPowerForStr (maximum transmit power of the streaming service)
MaxUlTxPowerForInt (maximum transmit power of the interactive service)
MaxUlTxPowerForBac (maximum transmit power of the background service)
Value Range
50 to 33
Physical Scope
50 dBm to 33 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm
Setting
The default values of MaxAllowedUlTxPower, MaxUlTxPowerForConv, MaxUlTxPowerForStr, MaxUlTxPowerForInt, and MaxUlTxPowerForBac are 24,
namely 24 dBm.
If a cell is capacity-limited, the four parameters are not the factors that restrict the cell because the transmit power of UEs can be timely adjusted. If a cell is coveragelimited whereas needs to provide full coverage, the formula related to the cell is as follows:
Itotal/PN.
. According to the formula, you can infer that:
and Noiserise =
Where,
PUE,max represents the maximum transmit power of a UE.

Lmax represents the maximum path loss.
V represents the activation factor of a service.
Gp represents the processing gain of a service. The formula is Gp = W/R (W represents the signal bandwidth; R represents the data rate of a service.)
Ga represents the antenna gain, which is the sum of the actual antenna gain and the cable loss gain.
Gd represents the sum of diversity gains, such as the multi-path diversity gain and receiver antenna gain.
PN represents the background noise.
Eb/Io represents the target SIR value of a service.
For the services that do not require full cell coverage, you can also use the previous formula to estimate the transmit power of the UE that meets the special
requirement for coverage area. If the transmit power of a UE has reached the maximum, you can use the previous formula to estimate the uplink coverage scope.
Impact on Network Performance
If the coverage is restricted, the uplink coverage scope is affected if this parameter is set to an excessively small value.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD CELLSELRESEL to modify MaxAllowedUlTxPower.
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MaxULTxPowerForConv, MaxUlTxPowerForStr,
MaxULTxPowerForInt, and MaxULTxPowerForBac.
Downlink Power Control Parameters

This describes the downlink power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of downlink power control parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default Configuration
MML Command
Level
7/18/2011
RlMaxDlPwr
Maximum transmit power of the DPDCH. It relative to

the maximum transmit power of the CPICH.
RlMinDlPwr
Minimum transmit power of the DPDCH. It is relative to

the minimum transmit power of the CPICH.
Page 7 of 205
Refer to List of the maximum and

minimum downlink transmit powers
Set: ADD
CELLRLPWR
Cell
Query: LST
CELLRLPWR
Modify: MOD
CELLRLPWR
PCPICHPower
Power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference

point of the parameter is the top of the NodeB cabinet.
330, namely 330 dBm.
Set: ADD PCPICH

Query: LST PCPICH
Modify: MOD CELL
MaxPCPICHPower Maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a

cell
346, namely 34.6 dBm.
Set: ADD PCPICH

Query: LST PCPICH
MinPCPICHPower Minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell 313, namely 31.3 dBm.
Modify: MOD
PCPICHPWR
Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This describes the maximum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the maximum transmit power of the CPICH.
Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link
This describes the minimum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the minimum transmit power of the CPICH.
PCPICH Transmit Power
This describes the power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the
parameter is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power
This describes the maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the
value of the parameter is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power
This describes the minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB and the
value of the parameter is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
Parent topic: Power Control Parameters

Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This describes the maximum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the maximum transmit power of the CPICH.
ID
RlMaxDlPwr
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB
Setting
The service type and service rate need to be considered for the configuration of RlMaxDlPwr. The values configured for single services are listed in Table 1.
Table 1 List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers
Service Type
Max. Downlink Transmit Power (in the parentheses is the dB

value)
Min. Downlink Transmit Power (in the parentheses is the dB

value)
12.2K AMR
-30 (-3)
180 (18)
64K transparent data
30 (3)
150 (15)
0 (0)
150 (15)
20 (2)
170 (17)
28.8K transparent data
20 (2)
170 (17)
57.6K controllable
stream
10 (1)
160 (16)
0 stream (unidirectional) 20 (2)
170 (17)
CS
PS
7/18/2011
Page 8 of 205
384K
40 (4)
110 (11)
256K
20 (2)
130 (13)
144K
0 (0)
150 (15)
128K
0 (0)
150 (15)
64K
-20 (-2)
170 (17)
32K
40 (4)
190 (19)
16K
60 (6)
210 (21)
8K
80 (8)
230 (23)
For combined services, the maximum and minimum transmit power is computed by the RNC according to the configuration of individual services.
If RlMaxDlPwr is excessively high, downlink interference may occur.

If RlMaxDlPwr is excessively low, the downlink power control may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLRLPWR to set, LST CELLRLPWR to query, and MOD CELLRLPWR to modify RlMaxDlPwr.
Parent topic: Downlink Power Control Parameters
Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This describes the minimum transmit power of the DPDCH, which is relative to the minimum transmit power of the CPICH.
ID
RlMinDlPwr
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
Refer to List of the maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers.
The value of RlMinDlPwr varies according to the specific services and is related to the value of Maxmum DL Tx Power and dynamic scope of power. Their
relation is shown in the following formula:
Minimum DL Tx Power = Maximum DL Tx Power - Dynamic scope of power control
Where, the dynamic scope of power control can be set to 15 dB.
If RlMinDlPwr is excessively low, the transmit power may become excessively low because of incorrect estimation of SIR.
If RlMinDlPwr is excessively high, the downlink power control may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLRLPWR to set, LST CELLRLPWR to query, and MOD CELLRLPWR to modify RlMinDlPwr.

This describes the power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the parameter is
related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
ID
PCPICHPower
7/18/2011
Page 9 of 205
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
10 dBm to 50 dBm, with the step of 0.1 dBm
Setting
The default value of PCPICHPower is 330, namely 33 dBm.
For a cell with large coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a comparatively high value; for a cell with small coverage, PCPICHPower should be set to a
comparatively low value. In a planned multi-cell environment, the minimum value of PCPICHPower is definite. If the value of PCPICHPower is lower than the
allowed minimum value, coverage holes may occur when the cells are under heavy load.
If PCPICHPower is excessively low, the downlink pilot coverage range is directly affected.
If PCPICHPower is excessively high, the downlink interference increases and the transmit power allocated to the service is reduced, and thus the downlink
capacity is affected.
In addition, the configuration of PCPICHPower also has direct influence on the distribution of handover areas.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD CELL to modify PCPICHPower.
Parent topic: Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters
Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power

This describes the maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of
the parameter is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
ID
MaxPCPICHPower
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of MaxPCPICHPower is 346, namely 34.6 dBm.
When setting MaxPCPICHPower, consider some factors of the actual system environment, such as the cell coverage scope (radius), geographic environment, and
total power of the cell. When the ratio of soft handover areas keeps the same, the downlink coverage cannot be promoted by the increase of PCIPCH power.
MaxPCPICHPower is the upper limit for the transmit power of the PCPICH. When modifying MaxPCPICHPower, ensure that MaxPCPICHPower is always
higher than the actually needed transmit power of the PCPICH.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD PCPICHPWR to modify MaxPCPICHPower.
Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power

This describes the minimum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB and the value of
the parameter is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
ID
MinPCPICHPower
7/18/2011
Page 10 of 205
Value Range
100 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of MinPCPICHPower is 313, namely 31.3 dBm.
When setting MinPCPICHPower, consider some factors of the actual system environment, such as the cell coverage scope (radius) and geographic environment. If
MinPCPICHPower is excessively small, the cell coverage is affected. Ensure that MinPCPICHPower is set under the condition of a proper proportion of soft
handover area, or under the condition that no coverage hole exists.
MaxPCPICHPower is the lower limit for the transmit power of the PCPICH. When modifying MinPCPICHPower, ensure that MinPCPICHPower is always
lower than the actually needed transmit power of the PCPICH.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCPICH to set, LST PCPICH to query, and MOD PCPICHPWR to modify MinPCPICHPower.
Handover Parameters
This describes handover parameters. Handover aims to ensure the communication continuity and quality. Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types:
soft handover, softer handover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard handover, and so on. Handover emerges as an
important factor affecting network performance, and handover optimization is also significant in the network optimization. Handover parameters are classified
according to handover classifications.
Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters
The common configurable coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters are listed here.
Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
This describes the coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.
Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters are listed here.
Blind Handover Management Parameters
This describes the blink handover management parameters.
Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters
This describes the cell selection and reselection parameters.
Neighboring Cell Management Parameters
This describes the neighboring cell management parameters.

Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
Softer handover combination indication switch
MAY
Set or modify: SET HOCOMM
RNC
DivCtrlField
Query: LST HOCOMM

2
IntraRelThdFor1APS
IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
Soft handover relative thresholds for event 1A and

event 1B
1A: 6 (3 dB)
For RNC
1B: 12 (6 dB)
Set or modify: SET

INTRAFREQHO
RNC/Cell
IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
Query: LST INTRAFREQHO
IntraRelThdFor1BPS
For Cell
IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
Set: ADD
7/18/2011
Page 11 of 205
IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
3
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
CELLINTRAFREQHO
Soft handover absolute thresholds for event 1F
EcNo: -24 dB
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
RSCP: -115 dBm
BlindHORSCP1FThreshold 1F event blind handover trigger condition
-115 dBm
HystFor1A
1A and 1B: 0 (0 dB)
Hysteresis related to soft handover for events 1A,

1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J
HystFor1B
Query: LST
CELLINTRAFREQHO
Modify: MOD
CELLINTRAFREQHO
1C/1D/1F/1J: 8 (4 dB)
HystFor1C
HystFor1D
HystFor1F
HystFor1J
6
TrigTime1A
Time-to-Trigger parameters related to soft

handover for events 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J
TrigTime1B
1A: D320 (320 ms)

1B/1C/1D/1F/1J: D640 (640
ms)
TrigTime1C
TrigTime1D
TrigTime1F
TrigTime1J
7
SHOQualmin
Minimum quality threshold of soft handover
-24 dB
ShoFailPeriod
Parameters related to soft handover failure
ShoFailPeriod: 60 (60 s)
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: 3
RelThdForDwnGrd
RelThdForDwnGrd: 2 (1 dB)
DcccShoPenaltyTime
DcccShoPenaltyTime: 30
(30 s)
Set or modify: SET

INTRAFREQHO
RNC
Query: LST INTRAFREQHO
CellsForbidden1A
Affect 1A and 1B threshold flag
AFFECT
Set: ADD
INTRAFREQNCELL
NCell
CellsForbidden1B
Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCELL
10
CIOOffset
Neighboring cell individual offset
Modify: MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL
11
CIO
Cell individual offset
Set:ADD CELLSETUP
Cell
Modify: MOD CELLSETUP
Switch of Softer Handover Combination Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether the NodeB implements the softer combination of radio links in soft handovers.
Soft Handover Relative Thresholds
These parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/No of PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the
active set (the best cell quality in case that W=0).
Soft Handover Absolute Thresholds
This describes the soft handover absolute thresholds. The soft handover absolute thresholds correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic
service QoS. The absolute thresholds of soft handovers are IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo correspond to Ec/No and IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP correspond to
RSCP.
1F Event Blind Handover Trigger Condition
This describes the threshold of triggering blind handover by 1F event.
Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover
This describes the hysteresis values of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J events.
Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover
This describes the trigger delay time of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F, and 1J events.
Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover
This describes the minimum quality threshold of soft handover. When the RNC receives events 1A, 1C and 1D, the target cell can be added to the active set
only when CPICH Ec/Io of the target cell is higher than this absolute threshold.
Parameters Related to Soft Handover Failure
This describes the parameters related to soft handover failure including maximum evaluation period of soft handover failure, threshold of soft handover failure
times, relative threshold for immediate slowdown upon soft handover failure, and penalty time for slowdown soft handover.
Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold Flag
This describes the flags CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B. The flags determine whether the relative thresholds of the 1A and 1B events are affected.
Neighboring Cell Individual Offset
This describes the neighboring cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.
Cell Individual Offset
This describes the cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.
7/18/2011
Page 12 of 205
Parent topic: Handover Parameters

Switch of Softer Handover Combination Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether the NodeB implements the softer combination of radio links in soft handovers.
ID
DivCtrlField
Value Range
MAY, MUST, MUST_NOT
Physical Scope
Softer combination may be implemented.

Softer combination must be implemented.
Softer combination must not be implemented.
Setting
The default value is MAY.
There are two combination methods for uplink combination of soft handover: one is the maximum ratio combination at the NodeB Rake receiver, which gives the
highest combination gain; the other is the selective combination at the RNC, which gives a relatively smaller combination gain.
The default value of the indication switch is MAY, which means that the NodeB decides whether to implement maximum ratio combination according to its own
physical conditions.
When MUST is selected, the NodeB is forced to carry out maximum ratio combination which is usually used in tests.
When MUST_NOT is selected, the NodeB is forbidden to carry out maximum ratio combination, and this method is adopted when maximum ratio
combination performance of softer handover is poor.
Consider the working status (test/normal operation) and the propagation environment when deciding whether to implement softer combination and to adopt which
kind of softer combination.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query DivCtrlField.
Parent topic: Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters
Soft Handover Relative Thresholds

These parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/No of PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set
(the best cell quality in case that W=0).
Parameter ID
IntraRelThdFor1APS
IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
IntraRelThdFor1BPS
IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
Value Range
0 to 29
Physical Value Range
0 to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
7/18/2011
Page 13 of 205
Parameter Setting
The default values of IntraRelThdFor1APS, IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP and IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP are 6, namely 3 dB.
The default values of IntraRelThdFor1BPS, IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP and IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP are 12, namely 6 dB.
As specified in Protocol 25.331, when CPICH Ec/No value is adopted as the measurement quantity, the following formula is adopted for the event 1A trigger
decision:
Where,
MNew is the measurement quantity of the cell that enters the report range;
CIONew is the offset of this cell;
Mi is the measurement quantity of the cells in the active set;
NA is the number of cells in the current active set;
MBest is the measurement quantity of the best cell in the active set;
W is the weighting value which is used for weighting the comprehensive quality of the best cell and the active set;
R1a is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;
H1a is the hysteresis value of event 1A.
The following event is taken as the trigger condition of event 1B:
Where,
MOld is the measurement quantity of the cell that leaves the report range;
CIOOld is the offset of this cell;
Mi is the measurement quantity of the cells in the active set;
NA is the number of cells in the current active set;
MBest is the measurement quantity of the best cell in the active set;
W is the weighting value used for weighing the comprehensive quality of the best cell and the active set;
R1b is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;
H1b is the hysteresis value of event 1B.
The selection of a relative threshold for handover corresponds directly to the soft handover proportion, and it should ensure the trouble-free implementation of
smoothing handover.
The parameter setting determines the size of the soft handover area and the user proportion involved in soft handover.
If the thresholds are high, the target cell joins the active set more easily, call drop occurs more difficultly, and the UE proportion in the state of soft handover
increases, but the forward resources are seriously occupied.
If the thresholds are low, the target cell joins the active set more difficultly, the communication quality cannot be guaranteed, and the implementation of
smoothing handover is affected.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET INTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST
CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify them through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.
Soft Handover Absolute Thresholds

This describes the soft handover absolute thresholds. The soft handover absolute thresholds correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service
QoS. The absolute thresholds of soft handovers are IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo correspond to Ec/No and IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP correspond to RSCP.
ID
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
Value Range
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: 24 to 0
7/18/2011
Page 14 of 205
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: 155 to 25
Physical Scope
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: 24 dB to 0 dB, with the step of 1 dB
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: 155 dBm to 25 dBm, with the step of 1 dBm
Setting
The default value of IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo is 24, namely 24 dB.
The default value of IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP is 115, namely 115 dBm.
Event 1F: The measurement quantity of the best cell's PCPICH is lower than the absolute threshold.
These values are the absolute thresholds used for 1F reports in the soft handover algorithm, corresponding to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic
service QoS and affecting the triggering of event 1F.
The 1F event is used to trigger emergency blind handover. If the best cell of the active set reports the 1F event, you can infer that the active set quality is rather poor,
and a blind handover is triggered at this moment to make the final attempt before call drops.
The emergency blind handover needs to be triggered on special occasions. The on-site measurement needs to be implemented to know the range of the pilot strength
of the best cell at the areas where blind handovers need to be triggered. The emergency blind handover function is usually not needed, so the absolute thresholds are
set to the minimum value by default, namely that emergency blind handovers are not triggered.
The higher the absolute thresholds are, the more easily blind handovers are triggered, and vice versa. In practice, adjust the thresholds according to the handover
policy and network coverage.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the soft handover absolute thresholds.
For the cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the soft handover absolute
thresholds.
1F Event Blind Handover Trigger Condition

This describes the threshold of triggering blind handover by 1F event.
Parameter ID
BlindHORSCP1FThreshold
Value Range
-155 to 25
-155 dBm to 25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default value is -115 dBm.
That parameter is used to judge whether to perform the blind handover. The smaller the value, the greater the probability of the blind handover. An extremely small
value, however, may lead to handover failure due to very low quality requirements.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET INTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST
CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify them through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.
7/18/2011
Page 15 of 205

Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover

This describes the hysteresis values of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F and 1J events.
ID
HystFor1A
HystFor1B
HystFor1C
HystFor1D
HystFor1F
HystFor1J
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Setting
The default values of events 1A and 1B hysteresis parameters are 0 (0 dB). The default values of other events are 8 (4 dB).
Event 1C: cell replacement in the active set.
Event 1D: For a cell in the active set, event 1D means that the best cell is modified; for a cell in the monitored set, event 1D means that the cell is added into the
active set and the best cell is modified.
1. Event 1A:
,
,
The first formula is used to trigger 1A, and the second one is used to cancel 1A. Therefore, the hysteresis range is the signal fluctuation range under usual
conditions, or the fluctuation range of the slow fading under the same condition.
2. Event 1B:
The first formula is used to trigger 1B, and the second one is used to cancel 1B.
3. Event 1C:
MNew MInAS + H1c/2
MNew MInAS - H1c/2
The value of HystFor1C ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. Because 1C is triggered when the active set size reaches the maximum value, the delay of handover at this
time does not lead to bad result. The signaling interaction caused by the ping-pong effect should be minimized in the parameter configuration, the parameter
can be increased appropriately in the adjustment.
4. Event 1D:
MNotBest MBest + H1d/2
The event cancellation formula has not been given in the protocol. According to the cancellation definitions of other events, the 1D cancellation definition can
be deduced as follows:
MNotBest MBest - H1d/2
7/18/2011
Page 16 of 205
The value of HystFor1D ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. Because all the handover policies are based on the best cell and the change of the best cell usually leads to
the update of the measurement control, the ping-pong change and mis-decision should be minimized in reports of event 1D. The parameter can be increased
appropriately in the adjustment.
5. Event 1F:
MNew T1f - H1f/2
MNew M1f + H1f/2
The value of HystFor1F ranges from 3 dB to 5 dB. The value of HystFor1F is usually the same as HystFor1B.
Table 1 lists the recommended values of HystFor1A for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 1 Typical values of HystFor1A
Speed (km/h)
Range
Recommended Value
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
50
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
6 (3 dB)
120
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
2 (1 dB)
Typical configuration
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
6 (3 dB)
Table 2 lists the recommended values of HystFor1B for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 2 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1B event
Speed (km/h)
Range
Recommended Value
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
50
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
120
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
2 (1 dB)
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
Table 3 lists the recommended values of HystFor1C for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 3 Typical values of the hysteresis for the 1C event
Speed (km/h)
Range
Recommended Value
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
50
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
120
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
4 (2 dB)
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
8 (4 dB)
Table 3 lists the recommended values of HystFor1D for different moving speeds of UE.
Table 2 lists the recommended values of HystFor1F for different moving speeds of UE.
The value of HystFor1F ranges from 2 dB to 5 dB. Event 1A means that cells are added to the active set, so it is a critical event. To guarantee timely handovers for
1A, the hysteresis for 1A can be set to be smaller than the hystereses for 1B, 1C, 1D, and 1F. There cannot be a big difference between hystereses for different events,
or the proportion of soft handovers is affected. When adjusting the hysteresis, consider the filtering factors and delay triggering.
If a hysteresis increases, the soft handover scope is reduced for the UEs in the soft handover area while increased for the UEs outside the soft handover area. If the
number of UEs in the soft handover area equals that of UEs outside the soft handover area, the change of a hysteresis has no impact on the actual proportion of soft
handovers. The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, the more ping-pong effect is suppressed, however, the more slowly
the handover algorithm responds to signal changes.
Related Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the hysteresis related to soft handovers.
Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the hysteresis related to soft
handovers.
7/18/2011
Page 17 of 205
Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover

This describes the trigger delay time of the 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1F, and 1J events.
ID
TrigTime1A
TrigTime1B
TrigTime1C
TrigTime1D
TrigTime1F
TrigTime1J
Value Range
Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
Working range: Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The default value for 1A is D320 (320 ms), and the default values for other events are D640 (640 ms).
The time-to-trigger mechanism is mainly used:
To reduce the number of wrong event reports caused by burst signals.

To suppress ping-pong handover to some degree.
To reduce the influence of shadow fading on event decisions.
The hysteresis can effectively reduce the average number of handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary handovers. 3GPP TS25.133 V3.6.0 prescribes that
the intra-frequency measurement physical layer updates the measurement result once every 200 ms, so the time to trigger shorter than 200 ms is invalid. The time-totrigger parameter should be close to a multiple of 200 ms.
UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs moving in a high speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger value, while
UEs moving in a slow speed are slow to the time-to-trigger value and cause fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong handovers. Therefore, the time-to-trigger
parameter can be set to a comparatively low value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a high speed, and can be set to a comparatively high value for the cells
where most UEs are moving in a slow speed.
Different events require different values of the time-to-trigger parameter:
The event (1A) of adding cells to the active set requires a comparatively short delay;
The events of replacing cells in the active set (1C and 1D) require relatively fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong handovers and have no big impact on the
call drop rate, and therefore TrigTime1C and TrigTime1D can be set to comparatively high values;
The events of deleting cells in the active set (1B and 1F) require fewer ping-pong handovers, so the initial settings of TrigTime1B can be the same as
TrigTime1A and can be adjusted according to the actual network statistics.
Table 1 lists the recommended value ranges of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F for macro cells.
Table 1 Typical values of TrigTime1B and TrigTime1F
Speed (km/h)
Range (ms)
Recommended Value (ms)
640 to 1280
1280
50
240 to 640
640
120
240 to 640
640
640 to 1280
640
The values listed in the preceding table should be reduced for micro cells.
The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is. The increase of the time to trigger causes a increase of call drops.
Related Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the time-to-trigger parameters.
7/18/2011
Page 18 of 205

Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify the time-to-trigger parameters.
Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover

This describes the minimum quality threshold of soft handover. When the RNC receives events 1A, 1C and 1D, the target cell can be added to the active set only
when CPICH Ec/Io of the target cell is higher than this absolute threshold.
ID
SHOQualmin
Value Range
24 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 24, namely -24 dB.
The purpose for setting SHOQualmin is as follows:
The current events of soft handovers are defined on the basis of relative thresholds and have no requirement about the absolute quality of cells. If the signals of added
cells are too bad, the comprehensive quality of the active set is not obviously improved and more downlink resources are occupied and more TPC errors are caused,
and the soft handover performance is worsened. Therefore, there should be a baseline for the quality of the radio links to be added.
The setting of SHOQualmin depends on the power distribution rate of public channels and demodulation capability of UEs.
Adjust SHOQualmin according to the Ec/Io that the cell soft handover area reaches as expected at network planning.
The higher SHOQualmin is, the more difficult it is for the neighboring cells to join in the active set, but the service quality of the joining cell can be ensured.
The lower SHOQualmin is, the easier it is for the neighboring cells to join in the active set, but the service quality of the cell cannot be restricted if
SHOQualmin is excessively low.
Related Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query SHOQualmin.
Use ADD CELLINTRAFREQHO to add, LST CELLINTRAFREQHO to query, and MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO to modify SHOQualmin.
Parameters Related to Soft Handover Failure

This describes the parameters related to soft handover failure including maximum evaluation period of soft handover failure, threshold of soft handover failure times,
relative threshold for immediate slowdown upon soft handover failure, and penalty time for slowdown soft handover.
Parameter ID
ShoFailPeriod
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
RelThdForDwnGrd
DcccShoPenaltyTime
Value Range
ShoFailPeriod: 0 to 120
7/18/2011
Page 19 of 205
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: 0 to 63
RelThdForDwnGrd: -29 to 29
DcccShoPenaltyTime: 0 to 255
ShoFailPeriod: 0 to 120 s
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd: None
RelThdForDwnGrd: -14.5 dB to 14.5 dB, step is 0.5 dB
DcccShoPenaltyTime: 0 to 255 s
Parameter Setting
The default value of ShoFailPeriod is 60, namely 60 s.
The default value of ShoFailNumForDwnGrd is 3.
The default value of RelThdForDwnGrd is -24, namely -24 dB.
The default value of DcccShoPenaltyTime is 30 s.
ShoFailPeriod(Maximum evaluation period of soft handover failure) :

An extremely short period will affect the triggering of slowdown soft handover, thus affecting the reduction of call drops. An extremely long period temporally
does not have any adverse effect.
ShoFailNumForDwnGrd(Threshold of soft handover failure times) :

The smaller the threshold, the greater probability of triggering slowdown before soft handover, but the higher the success rate of handover. The greater the
threshold, the greater probability of handover attempt failures.
RelThdForDwnGrd(Relative threshold for immediate slowdown upon soft handover failure) :

The greater the threshold, the greater the probability of meeting the slowdown conditions, but the higher the successf rate of soft handover.
DcccShoPenaltyTime(Penalty time for slowdown soft handover) :

If the value is too small, it may lead to invalid penalty, that is, the speedup may be triggered due to the DCCC cause and call drops may be increased. If the
value is too large, the speedup of subscribers may be delayed, and the user experience may be affected
Relevant Commands
Use SET INTRAFREQHO to set and LST INTRAFREQHO to query the parameters.
Affect 1A and 1B Event Threshold Flag

This describes the flags CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B. The flags determine whether the relative thresholds of the 1A and 1B events are affected.
ID
CellsForbidden1A
CellsForbidden1B
Value Range
NOT_AFFECT, AFFECT
Physical Scope
Not affected, Affected
Setting
The default value is AFFECT.
In the following formulas for calculating relative thresholds of 1A and 1B, CellsForbidden1A and CellsForbidden1B determine whether the measurement value Mi
7/18/2011
of corresponding cell i is counted in
. If the value of CellsForbidden1A or CellsForbidden1B is AFFECT, Mi is counted in
Page 20 of 205
. If the value of
CellsForbidden1A or CellsForbidden1B is NOT_AFFECT, Mi is not counted in

When W in the preceding formulas is 0, the value of CellsForbidden1A or CellsForbidden1B has no impact on the results of the formulas.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to add, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify CellsForbidden1A and
CellsForbidden1B.

This describes the neighboring cell offset for intra-frequency handovers.
ID
CIOOffset
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
The UE adds the CIOOffset and CIO to the original measured value of the cell, and uses the sum as the measurement result for the UE intra-frequency
handover decision. CIOOffset plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.
The higher CIOOffset is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward
resources are occupied.
The lower CIOOffset is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to add, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify CIOOffset.

ID
CIO
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 21 of 205
handover decision. CIO plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.
The higher CIO is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward resources
are occupied.
The lower CIO is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to add and MOD CELLSETUP to modify CIO.
Parent topic: Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters
Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of coverage-based inter-frequency handover parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
InterFrequency
measurement
report mode
Periodical_reporting
For RNC
RNC
Set or modify: SET

INTERFREQHOCOV
Cell
InterFrequency
measurement
periodic
report
interval
500 ms
Hysteresis
related to
interfrequency
handover
Hystfor2B, Hystfor2D, Hystfor2F: 4 (2 dB)
InterFreqReportMode
PrdReportInterval
Hystfor2B
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
For Cell
HystforHHO: 0 (0 dB)
TIMETOTRIG2B
Time-toTrigger
related to
TIMETOTRIG2D
interfrequency
TIMETOTRIG2F
hard
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ handover
TIMETOTRIG2B: D0
InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP
RSCP-Based
interfrequency
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
2D: -95 dBm;
Ec/No-based
interfrequency
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
2D: -14 dB
Target
frequency
trigger
RSCP: -92 dBm
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FRSCP
INTERFREQHTHD2FRSCP
Set: ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
HystforHHO
4
Query: LST
INTERFREQHOCOV
TIMETOTRIG2D: D320
TIMETOTRIG2F: D1280
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ: 0
2F: -92 dBm
InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DRSCP
INTERFREQHTHD2DRSCP
6
InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo
InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0
2F: -12 dB
INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0
INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0
7
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP
TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP
Ec/No: -12 dB
7/18/2011
TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP
TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0
Page 22 of 205
threshold of
interfrequency
coverage
TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0
TARGETFREQHTHDECN0
8
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0
Current used
frequency
quality
threshold of
interfrequency
handover
RSCP: -92 dBm

Ec/No: -12 dB
USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0
USEDFREQHTHDECN0
9
PeriodFor2B
Retry period
of 2B event
500 ms
10
AmntOfRpt2B
Maximum
retry times of
2B event
Infinity
11
CIOOffset
Neighboring
0 dB
cell individual
offset
Set: ADD
INTERFREQNCELL
NCell
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
12
CIO
Cell
individual
offset
0 dB
13
INTERFREQRATSWITCH
Inter-Freq
and InterRAT coexist
switch
InterFreq
Set: ADD CELLSETUP
Cell

Set: ADD CELLHOCOMM
Cell
Query: LST
CELLHOCOMM
Modify: MOD
CELLHOCOMM
14
CoExistMeasThdChoice
InterFreq and COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ For RNC: SET

InterRAT
INTERFREQHOCOV
coexist
measure
LST INTERFREQHOCOV
threshold
choice
For Cell:ADD
CELLHOCOMM
RNC/Cell
LST CELLHOCOMM
MOD CELLHOCOMM
15
INTERFREQMEASTIME
Inter-freq
60 s
measure timer
length[s]
Set: ADD
Cell
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV
16
HOCovPrio
CoverageBased interfrequency
handover
priority
Set:ADD
INTERFREQNCELL
Cell
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCELL
Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-frequency measurement report mode: the periodical report mode or event trigger mode.
Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report Interval
This describes the interval for periodic report of inter-frequency measurement.
Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover
This describes the trigger hystereses for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs).
Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover
This describes the trigger delay time for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs) in the coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.
7/18/2011
Page 23 of 205
Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement

This describes the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement. In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when
the periodical report mode is used for the inter-frequency measurement, the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency
measurement correspond to the absolute thresholds of inter-frequency measurement events, including the absolute thresholds of the 2D event and 2F
event, when RSCP is used for measurement.
EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency measurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No
is used for measurement.
Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as
the mandatory threshold requirement satisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory conditions for
triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameter is used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover
event.
Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters are used for measurement control of event 2B. Only when
the quality of used frequency is poorer than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.
Retry Period of 2B Event
This parameter specifies the 2B event retry period.
Maximum Retry Times of 2B Event
This parameter specifies the 2B event maximum retry times.
This describes the neighboring cell offset for inter-frequency handovers.
Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch
This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist switch. The switch indicates how to perform neighboring cell measurement if a cell has both
inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement Threshold Choice
This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist measurement threshold switch. The switch determines what configuration parameters for
the 2D and 2F events should be chosen based on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells.
Inter-Frequency Measurement Timer Length
This describes the inter-frequency measurement timer length. The inter-frequency measurement timer is used to prevent a cell from keeping in the
inter-frequency measurement state (compressed mode) for a long time if the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the handover condition.
Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Priority
This parameters specifies the priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.

Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-frequency measurement report mode: the periodical report mode or event trigger mode.
ID
InterFreqReportMode
Value Range
Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)
Physical Scope
Periodical_reporting indicates that the periodical reporting mode is used.
Event_trigger indicates that the event triggering mode is used.
Setting
The default value is Periodical_reporting.
There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report and periodical report, which are selected through the inter-frequency
report mode switch. This algorithm switch is oriented to RNC configuration.
Event report:
To prevent ping-pong effect before and after inter-frequency handovers, the 2B event (the quality of current in-use frequency is lower than the
threshold of current frequency quality, and the quality of frequencies that are not used currently is higher than the target frequency trigger threshold)
is used to trigger inter-frequency handovers. As the 2B event has no event transfer period mechanism, the function of retrying after handover failures
is not implemented, unless this cell can trigger 2B events again.
Advantage:
The event report can save signaling transmission resources and reduce processing load. In event report mode, the quality of intra-frequency signals
and inter-frequency signals can be compared to avoid ping-pong handovers in a degree.
Disadvantage:
7/18/2011
Page 24 of 205
The event report can be reported only once, because no event transfer period mechanism is available. If a handover fails, the periodical retry can be
triggered only by an internal timer. If the algorithm parameters are oriented to the cell level, the inter-frequency measurement parameters need to be
updated every time after the optimal cell is updated.
Periodical report:
The 2D and 2F events are used to start and stop the compressed modes. In the period of the compressed mode, the measurement result of interfrequency neighboring cells is reported. When the cell quality reported by the UE is higher than the sum of a absolute threshold and its hysteresis, the
system starts the delay triggering timer. If the cell quality meets the requirement throughout the duration of the timer, the system starts an interfrequency handover after the timer times out.
If the handover fails, the system implements handover decision based on the periodical report of inter-frequency measurement again.
Advantage:
After a handover fails, the system can use the periodical reports to retry for many times for a cell. The algorithm of the periodical report can be
flexibly extended. Parameters of the periodical reports are oriented to cells, so the RNC updates the parameters when implementing internal handover
decision and the system needs not to use signaling messages to inform UEs of the parameter change after handovers occur.
Disadvantage:
A large amount of signaling is needed. The air-interface load and signaling processing load increases.

The periodical report and event report have both advantages and disadvantages. Currently, the periodical report mode is most commonly used.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query InterFreqReportMode.
For the cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify
InterFreqReportMode.
Inter-Frequency Measurement Periodic Report Interval

This describes the interval for periodic report of inter-frequency measurement.
ID
PrdReportInterval
Value Range
NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000, D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000
Physical Scope
No periodic report, 250, 500, 1000, 2000,3000, 4000, 6000, 8000, 12000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 64000, step is ms.
Setting
The default value is D500, namely 500 ms.
Reporting once every such interval when periodic report is enabled. It is recommended that the value should not be set to NON_PERIODIC_REPORT,
otherwise the UE action is unknown.
The shorter the interval is, the more timely the measurement report is, but the load over the air interface is increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query PrdReportInterval.
PrdReportInterval.
7/18/2011
Page 25 of 205

Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover

This describes the trigger hystereses for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs).
ID
Hystfor2B
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforHHO
Value Range
0 to 29
Physical Scope
Setting
The default values of Hystfor2B, Hystfor2D, and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB. The default value of HystforHHO is 0, namely 0 dB.
In periodic report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to prevent ping-pong handovers of the 2D event (the estimated quality
of the current frequency is lower than a threshold) and the 2F event (the estimated quality of the current frequency is higher than a threshold). The 2D
event is used to start the compressed mode, while the 2F event is used to stop the compressed mode. Therefore, Hystfor2D can be higher than the
recommended value based on the statistics about the ping-pong effect of inter-frequency handovers, and Hystfor2F can be higher than the recommended
value. In this way, frequent actions of starting and stopping the compressed mode are prevented and unnecessary updates of the active set are reduced.
When setting hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers, consider the radio environment (feature of slow fading), actual handover distance, and UEs'
moving speed. The values of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers range from 2 dB to 5 dB. When adjusting the hystereses, consider the filtering
factors and delay triggering.
Table 1 lists the recommended value ranges of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers.
Table 1 Typical values of hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers
Speed (km/h)
Scope (CPICH RSCP)
Low speed (5)
8 to 12 (4 dBm to 6 dBm) 10 (5 dBm)
Recommended Value (CPICH RSCP)
6 to 10 (3 dB to 5 dB)
10 (5 dB)
Middle speed (50)
6 to 8 (3 dBm to 4 dBm)
8 (4 dBm)
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
6 (3 dB)
High speed (120)
4 to 8 (2 dBm to 4 dBm)
6 (3 dBm)
2 to 6 (1 dB to 3 dB)
4 (2 dB)
4 to 10 (2 dB to 5 dB)
6 (3 dB)
Typical configuration 6 to 12 (3 dBm to 6 dBm) 8 (4 dBm)
Scope (CPICH Ec/No) Recommended Value (CPICH Ec/No)
In event report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to decrease the frequent handovers triggered by event 2B because of radio
channel changing. The 2B event triggers inter-frequency coverage handovers. The frequent reports of 2B events can be used to implement retry (for the
same or different cells) for many times after handover failures. If the 2B event is triggered frequently in the same cell, and the handovers in the cell always
fail, the system may retry ineffectively for many times. In this case, signaling resources are wasted and the system processing load increases. Hystfor2B is set
to 0 currently and needs to be optimized based on the actual situation.
The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, and the more ping-pong effect is suppressed. In this case, the
handover algorithm responds to signal changes more slowly.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the hystereses related to inter-frequency handovers.
Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the hystereses
related to inter-frequency handovers.
7/18/2011
Page 26 of 205
Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover

This describes the trigger delay time for the 2B, 2D, 2F events, and hard handovers (HHOs) in the coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.
ID
TIMETOTRIG2B
TIMETOTRIG2D
TIMETOTRIG2F
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ
Value Range
The value ranges and working ranges of TIMETOTRIG2B, TIMETOTRIG2D, and TIMETOTRIG2F are as follows:
Value range: Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
Working range: Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ ranges 0 to 64000.

Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ ranges 0 to 64000 ms.
Setting
Default values
TIMETOTRIG2B: D0
TIMETOTRIG2D: D320
TIMETOTRIG2F: D1280
TIMETOTRIGFORPRDINTERFREQ: 0
The previous simulation results show that hystereses can effectively reduce the average number of handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary
handovers. Because the report period of inter-frequency measurement is 480 ms, the trigger time shorter than 480 ms is invalid.
UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs moving in a high speed are sensitive to the time-to-trigger
value, while UEs moving in a slow speed are slow to the time-to-trigger value. Therefore, the time-to-trigger parameter can be set to a low value for the cells
where most UEs are moving in a high speed, and can be set to a comparatively high value for the cells where most UEs are moving in a slow speed. The
time-to-trigger parameters need to be adjusted based on the actual network statistics.
Table 1 lists the value ranges and recommended values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers.
Table 1 Typical values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers
Speed (km/h)
Range (ms)
640 to 1280
1280
50
240 to 640
640
120
240 to 640
640
640 to 1280
640

The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the more difficult it is for handovers to occur, and the possibility of call drops increases.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers.
Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the time-totrigger parameters related to inter-frequency handovers.
7/18/2011
Page 27 of 205
Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement

This describes the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement. In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the
periodical report mode is used for the inter-frequency measurement, the start or stop thresholds for the RSCP-based inter-frequency measurement
correspond to the absolute thresholds of inter-frequency measurement events, including the absolute thresholds of the 2D event and 2F event, when RSCP is
used for measurement.
ID
InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurement quantity of RSCP for CS domain services)
InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurement quantity of RSCP for CS domain services)
InterFreqR99PSThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain R99 services)
InterFreqHThd2DRSCP (Threshold to trigger inter-frequency measurement with measurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain HSPA services)
InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain R99 services)
InterFreqHThd2FRSCP (Threshold to stop inter-frequency measurement with measurement quantity of RSCP for PS domain HSPA services)
Value Range
115 to 25
Physical Scope
Setting
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP, InterFreqR99PsThd2DRSCP and InterFreqHThd2DRSCP are 95.
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP, InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSCP and InterFreqHThd2FRSCP are 92.
When the current measured value of frequency points is lower than the absolute threshold of the 2D event, UEs report 2D events, and the RNC delivers
signaling messages to start the compressed mode and inter-frequency measurement. When the current measured value of frequency points is higher than
the absolute threshold of the 2F event, UEs report 2F events, and the RNC delivers signaling messages to stop the compressed mode and inter-frequency
measurement.
The threshold for starting the inter-frequency measurement (namely the threshold for starting the compressed mode) is the most important parameter in
the inter-frequency handover policy, because the threshold affects the proportion of the UEs in compressed mode and the success rate of hard handovers.
When setting the threshold, consider the following factors:
Moving speed of UEs

Cell radius
Path loss
Table 1 list the inter-frequency measurement start thresholds, which are represented by RSCP, of the cells on the edge of carrier coverage.
Table 1 Thresholds (RSCP) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in different speeds
Speed (km/h)
Inter-frequency measurement start threshold (dBm)
-100
50
-97
120
-93
In actual situations, there may be UEs moving with different speeds in a cell, so the recommended value of the inter-frequency measurement start threshold
of all cells is 95 dBm. The emulation result shows that the call drop rate is still low for UEs moving with the speed of 120 km/h when the inter-frequency
measurement start threshold is set to 95 dBm.
For the cells at the center of the coverage areas, the inter-frequency measurement start thresholds represented by Ec/No are shown in the following table:
Table 2 Thresholds (EcIo) for starting inter-frequency measurement for UEs moving in different speeds
Speed (km/h)
Inter-frequency measurement start threshold (dB)
-17
50
-14
120
-12
In the cells at the center of the coverage areas, UEs preferentially implement intra-frequency soft handovers, so inter-frequency hard handovers are
unnecessary. In addition, the starting of the compressed mode reduces the communication quality of UEs and increases network interference, so the
recommended value of the inter-frequency measurement start threshold for the cells at the center of the coverage areas is 24 dB, namely that the
compressed mode is not started for the cells at the center of the coverage areas.
7/18/2011
Page 28 of 205
If a cell is a macro cell, there must be micro cells in the coverage of the cell. To enable the micro cells to use the traffic absorption function, the interfrequency measurement start or stop threshold should be set to a comparatively high value, namely the thresholds for events 2D and 2F should be set to
comparatively high values (represented by CPICH RSCP).
If a cell is a micro cell, the preceding default values should be modified according to the link budget.
The 2D and 2F events are switches for starting and stopping the compressed mode. If a cell is on the edge of coverage, the measured value of RSCP is used
as the decision standard for the 2D and 2F events. Therefore, the threshold of the 2D event needs to be set to a high value to start the compression mode
early. To reduce the ping-pong effect of starting and stopping the compressed mode, increase the difference between the thresholds for the 2D event and the
2F event.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query the inter-frequency measurement thresholds.
Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify the interfrequency measurement thresholds.
EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency measurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used
for measurement.
Parameter ID
InterFreqCSThd2DEcN0 (Inter-freq CS measure start Ec/No THD)
InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0 (Inter-freq CS measure stop Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0 (Inter-freq H measure start Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD)
INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0 (Inter-freq H measure stop Ec/No THD)
Value Range
-24 to 0
-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
Parameter Setting
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DecN0, INTERFREQR99PSTHD2DECN0 and INTERFREQHTHD2DECN0 are -14, namely -14 dB
The default values for InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0, INTERFREQR99PSTHD2FECN0 and INTERFREQHTHD2FECN0 are -12, namely -12 dB.
For the detailed descriptions, refer to Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement.
Set the event 2D threshold to a relatively greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise, set it to a relatively less
value. To control the ping-pong effect of the compressed mode start/stop, increase appropriately the difference between the thresholds for events 2D and 2F.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET INTERFREQHOCOV and query them through LST
INTERFREQHOCOV.
For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, and modify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.
7/18/2011
Page 29 of 205
Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the
mandatory threshold requirement satisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory conditions for triggering
event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameter is used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.
Parameter ID
TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq CS target frequency trigger RSCP THD)
TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
TARGETFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-freq H target frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq R99 PS target frequency trigger RSCP THD)
TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-freq H target frequency trigger RSCP THD)
Value Range
TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and TARGETFREQHTHDECN0: -24 to 0
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 to -25
TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and TARGETFREQHTHDECN0: -24 dB to 0 dB
TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values of TARGETFREQCSTHDECN0, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and TARGETFREQHTHDECN0 are -12 dB.
The default values of TARGETFREQCSTHDRSCP, TARGETFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and TARGETFREQHTHDRSCP are -92 dBm.
The greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SET INTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST
INTERFREQHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST
Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters are used for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the
quality of used frequency is poorer than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.
Parameter ID
Based on different inter-frequency measurement quantities in use and different borne services, it can be:
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-freq H Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-freq R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-freq H Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 30 of 205
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -24 to 0

USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 to -25
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values of USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0 are -12 dB.
The default values of USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP are -92 dBm.
Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:
The cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and cannot better satisfy the coverage requirement of current service. After handover is completed, it is
hard to hand over to the current used frequency cell again even inter-frequency measurement is started again. In other words, these parameters should be
set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F, or equal to the threshold of event 2D.
Higher values of these parameters get event 2B to be more easily triggered.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SET INTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST
INTERFREQHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST
Retry Period of 2B Event

This parameter specifies the 2B event retry period.
ID
PeriodFor2B
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
500 ms to 32000 ms, step is 500 ms.
Setting
The default value is 1, namely 500 ms.
The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system processing resource will be a little increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query PeriodFor2B.
Use ADD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV to modify PeriodFor2B.
Maximum Retry Times of 2B Event
7/18/2011
Page 31 of 205
This parameter specifies the 2B event maximum retry times.

ID
AmntOfRpt2B
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
0 to 63 times, 64 means Infinity.
Setting
The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system processing resource will be a little increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHOCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHOCOV to query AmntOfRpt2B.
AmntOfRpt2B.

This describes the neighboring cell offset for inter-frequency handovers.
ID
CIOOffset
Value Range
20 to 20
Physical Scope
Setting
handover decision. CIOOffset plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm.
The higher CIOOffset is, the easier it is for soft handovers to occur, and the more UEs there are in the soft handover state, but the more forward
resources are occupied.
The lower CIOOffset is, the more difficult it is for soft handovers to occur, which is likely to affect the reception quality.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to add, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify CIOOffset.
Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch
7/18/2011
Page 32 of 205
This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist switch. The switch indicates how to perform neighboring cell measurement if a cell has both interfrequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells.
ID
InterFreqRATSwitch
Value Range
Enum(InterFreq, InterRAT, SimInterFreqRAT)
Physical Scope
Only the inter-frequency neighboring cells are measured.

Only the inter-RAT neighboring cells are measured.
Both the inter-frequency neighboring cells and the inter-RAT neighboring cells are measured.
Setting
The default setting is InterFreq.
For a cell having both inter-frequency neighboring cells and inter-RAT neighboring cells, set InterFreqRATSwitch based on the actual handover policy.
InterFreq means that only the inter-frequency cells are measured and the inter-frequency handover is implemented. InterRAT means that only the GSM
cells are measured and only the inter-RAT handover is implemented. SimInterFreqRAT means that both the inter-frequency cells and inter-RAT cells are
measured and the handover mode depends on which cell meets the handover decision condition.
InterFreqRATSwitch is invalid when only inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells are available.
This parameter determines the cell handover policy when inter-frequency neighboring cells co-exist with inter-RAT neighboring cells. Configure this
parameter for each cell.
Related Commands
For the cell-oriented handover parameters, use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, use MOD CELLHOCOMM to modify, and use LST CELLHOCOMM to
query InterFreqRATSwitch.
Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Measurement Threshold Choice

This describes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT coexist measurement threshold switch. The switch determines what configuration parameters for the 2D
and 2F events should be chosen based on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells.
ID
CoExistMeasThdChoice
Value Range
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT
Physical Scope
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ indicates that the 2D and 2F measurement threshold parameters oriented to inter-frequency are chosen
as thresholds for cell subscribers to enable or disable the compress mode.
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT indicates that the 2D and 2F measurement threshold parameters oriented to inter-RAT are chosen as
thresholds for cell subscribers to enable or disable the compress mode.
Setting
The default setting is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ.
During the setting, take into account the following items: Thresholds for 2D and 2F events in inter-frequency and inter-RAT systems, thresholds for the
inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover, and current handover policies. For instance, if the threshold for an inter-RAT 2D event is higher than that for an
inter-frequency 2D event, you can choose the inter-frequency measurement threshold parameters to have the system be able to choose inter-frequency
neighboring cells when the inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells coexist.
CoExistMeasThdChoice is set on the basis of the actual network handover policy.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 33 of 205
For the RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query CoExistMeasThdChoice.
For the cell-oriented handover common parameters, use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, MOD CELLHOCOMM to modify, and LST CELLHOCOMM to
query CoExistMeasThdChoice.

This describes the inter-frequency measurement timer length. The inter-frequency measurement timer is used to prevent a cell from keeping in the interfrequency measurement state (compressed mode) for a long time if the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the handover condition.
ID
INTERFREQMEASTIME
Value Range
Integer (0...512)
Physical Scope
Integer (0...512) second(s)
Setting
The default value is 60, namely 60 s.
The system stops inter-frequency measurement and disables the enabled compression mode, if no inter-frequency handover occurs upon expiration of the
inter-frequency measurement timer.
For the coverage-based inter-frequency measurement, it can use 2F event report to disable compression mode. But for the non-coverage inter-frequency
measurement, it can disable compressed mode only by measurement timer. So it is recommended not set the timer to 0.
This parameter is used to reduce the impact on serving cells by shortening the time for compression mode.
If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover. If the coverage-based inter-frequency handover is not
triggered when the timer expires, the compress mode will be closed and the call may drops.
Related Commands
INTERFREQMEASTIME.
For the non-coverage-based inter-frequency handover:
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query INTERFREQMEASTIME.
Parent topic: Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters
Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Priority

This parameters specifies the priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.
ID
HOCovPrio
Value Range
0 to 3.
Physical Scope
0 means not supporting coverage-based inter-frequency handover. 1 means the highest priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover. 3 means the
lowest priority of coverage-based inter-frequency handover.
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 34 of 205

None.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to add andLST INTERFREQNCELL to queryHOCovPrio.
Non Coverage-Based Inter-Frequency Handover Management Parameters

The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of non-coverage-based inter-Frequency handover management parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
Hystfor2C
Hysteresis for the 2C event
Set: SET INTERFREQHONCOV
RNC
TrigTime2C
Time-to-Trigger for the 2C event
D640 (640
ms)
InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0 Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No

Threshold
-16 dB
PeriodFor2C
Retry period of 2C event
2s
AmntOfRpt2C
Maximum retry times of 2C event
InterFreqMeasTime
Inter-Frequency measurement timer length
60 s
DlRscpQosHyst
Hysteresis of downlink RSCP QoS frequency
4 dB
DLQosMcTimerLen
DownLink Qos measurement timer length
20 s
ULQosMcTimerLen
UpLink Qos measurement timer length
20 s
Query: LST
INTERFREQHONCOV
Set: SET QOSHO

Query: LST QOSHO
Hysteresis of Event 2C
This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not based on coverage.
Time to Trigger for Event 2C
This describes the time to trigger the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not based on coverage.
Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No Threshold
This parameter specifies the threshold of Ec/No value on the target frequency for inter-frequency handover.
Retry Period of 2C Event
This parameter specifies the 2C event retry period.
Maximum Retry Times of 2C Event
This parameter specifies the 2C event maximum retry times.
This describes the inter-frequency measurement timer length. The inter-frequency measurement timer is used to prevent a cell from keeping in the
inter-frequency measurement state (compressed mode) for a long time if the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the handover condition.
Hysteresis of Downlink RSCP QoS Frequency
This parameter is used in both inter-rat handover and inter-frequency handover.
DownLink Qos Measurement Timer Length
UpLink Qos Measurement Timer Length

This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not based on coverage.
ID
Hystfor2C
Value Range
0 to 29
Physical Scope
7/18/2011
Page 35 of 205

Setting
The default value is 6, namely 3 dB.
The event 2C is applied to non-coverage-based inter-frequency hard handover scenarios where inter-frequency measurement needs to be started.
The value is related to the slow fading feature. The higher the parameter is, the less the ping-pong effect and the fewer the decision mistakes. In this case,
however, the event 2C might not be triggered in time.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query Hystfor2C.

This describes the time to trigger the 2C event in inter-Frequency handovers that are not based on coverage.
ID
TrigTime2C
Value Range
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The value is related to the slow fading feature. The higher the parameter is, the fewer the decision mistakes. In this case, however, the event 2C might not be
triggered in time.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query TrigTime2C.
Inter-Frequency Measure Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No Threshold

This parameter specifies the threshold of Ec/No value on the target frequency for inter-frequency handover.
Parameter ID
InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0
Value Range
-24 to 0
-24 dB to 0 dB
Parameter Setting
The default values is -16, namely -16 dB.
The greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.
7/18/2011
Page 36 of 205
Relevant Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query InterFreqNCovHOThdEcN0.

ID
PeriodFor2C
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
Setting
The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system processing resource will be increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query PeriodFor2C.

ID
AmntOfRpt2C
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
Setting
The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to inter-frequency cellbut the system processing resource will be increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERFREQHONCOV to set and LST INTERFREQHONCOV to query AmntOfRpt2C.

ID
7/18/2011
Page 37 of 205
DlRscpQosHyst
Value Range
-15 to 15
Physical Scope
-15 dB to 15 dB.
Setting
In event-trigger mode, the frequency threshold for the inter-frequency, inter-rat measurement triggered due to downlink QoS causes, and RSCP
measurement quantity adopts the frequency threshold of coverage measurement configured on the daemon minus this parameter.
The greater the delay, the more likely to trigger the 2B/3A eventmore easily handover to the target cell.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DlRscpQosHyst.
Parent topic: Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters

ID
DLQosMcTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 s to 512 s.
Setting
After DownLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires, the Qos measurement is stopped.
If there is no coverage-based measurement on, the inter-frequency or inter-system measurement is stopped. In addition, the compressed mode is
deactivated, if any. The value 0 indicates the timer is not to be enabled.
If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover, that may lead to call drops.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query DLQosMcTimerLen.

ID
ULQosMcTimerLen
7/18/2011
Page 38 of 205
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 s to 512 s.
Setting
After UpLink Qos measurement starts, if no handover is performed, when this timer expires, the Qos measurement is stopped.
If there is no coverage-based measurement on, the inter-frequency or inter-system measurement is stopped. In addition, the compressed mode is
deactivated, if any. The value 0 indicates the timer is not to be enabled.
If the compress mode is closed in advance, the UE cannot initiate an inter-frequency handover, that may lead to call drops.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query ULQosMcTimerLen.
Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters

This describes the coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.
Table 1 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
InterRATReportMode
Inter-RAT measurement
report mode
Periodical_reporting
For the RNC
RNC/Cell
InterPeriodReportInterval
Inter-RAT period report

interval
D1000 (1000 ms)
Set or modify: SET

INTERRATHOCOV
BSICVerify
BSIC verify selection

switch
Require
MEASQUANTITYOF3A
Inter-RAT measurement
quantity
MEASQUANTITYOF3A: AUTO
InterRATCSThd2DRSCP
RSCP-Based inter-RAT
measurement start/stop
InterRATR99PSThd2DRSCP thresholds
InterRATCSThd2DRSCP: 100 (dBm)

InterRATR99PSThd2DRSCP and
InterRATHThd2DRSCP: 110 (dBm)
InterRATHThd2DRSCP
Query: LST
INTERRATHOCOV
For the cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERRATHOCOV
InterRATCSThd2FRSCP: 97 (dBm)
InterRATCSThd2FRSCP
InterRATR99PSThd2FRSCP and
InterRATHThd2FRSCP: 107 (dBm)
InterRATR99PSThd2FRSCP
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV
InterRATHThd2FRSCP
6
INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 Ec/No-based inter-RAT

measurement start/stop
InterRATR99PSThd2DEcN0 thresholds
INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0: 14 (dB)
InterRATR99PSThd2DEcN0 and
InterRATHThd2DEcNO: 15 (dB)
InterRATHThd2DEcN0
INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0: 12 (dB)
INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0
InterRATR99PSThd2FEcN0 and
InterRATHThd2FEcNO: 13 (dB)
InterRATR99PSThd2FEcN0
InterRATHThd2FEcNO
7
InterRATCovHOCSThd
Inter-RAT handover
decision thresholds
16, namely 95 dBm
TARGETRATR99PSTHD
TARGETRATHTHD
7/18/2011
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
Time-to-Trigger related
to inter-RAT handover
event
TrigTime3A
9
Hystfor3A
Page 39 of 205
TRIGTIME2D: D320
TRIGTIME2F: D1280
TRIGTIME3A: D0
Hysteresis related to
inter-RAT handover
Hystfor2D
2D/2F/3A: 4 (2 dB)
HystforInterRAT: 0 (0 dB)
Hystfor2F
HystforInterRAT
10
TimeToTrigForVerify
Time-to-Trigger for
verified GSM cells
0 ms, namely that the handover is

implemented immediately
11
TimeToTrigForNonVerify
Time-to-Trigger for nonverified GSM cells
0 ms
12
UsedFreqCsThdEcN0
Inter-RAT CS Used
frequency trigger Ec/No
THD
UsedFreqCsThdEcN0: 12 (dB)
UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0
UsedFreqHThdEcN0
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP
UsedFreqR99PsThdRSCP
UsedFreqHThdRSCP
Inter-RAT R99 PS Used

THD
Inter-RAT H Used
THD
UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0 and
UsedFreqHThdEcN0: 13 (dB)
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP: 97 (dBm)
UsedFreqR99PsThdRSCP and
UsedFreqHThdRSCP: 107 (dBm)
Inter-RAT CS Used
frequency trigger RSCP
THD
Inter-RAT R99 PS Used
THD
Inter-RAT H Used
THD
13
InterRATMeasTime
Time length of the interRAT measurement timer
60 s
14
PeriodFor3A
Retry period of 3A event
1, namely 500 ms
15
AmntOfRpt3A
Maximum retry times of

3A event
63, namely Infinity
16
CIOOffset
Neighboring cell
individual offset
0 dB
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
NCell
Query: LST GSMNCELL

Modify: MOD GSMNCELL
17
CIO
Cell individual offset
0 dB
Set: ADD GSMCELL
Cell
Query: LST GSMCELL

Modify: MOD GSMCELL
Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-RAT measurement report mode: the periodical report more or the event trigger mode.
Inter-RAT Periodical Report Interval
This describes the measurement report interval when the periodical reporting mode is selected for the inter-RAT measurement.
BSIC Verify Selection Switch
This describes the BSIC verify selection switch. The parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, report is
allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells can be reported
so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.
Event 3A Measurement Quantity
Parameter MEASQUANTITYOF3A is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.
RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement events when RSCP is used for measurement.
Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement event when Ec/No is used for measurement.
Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds
Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judging threshold TARGETRATCSTHD and the inter-RAT PS
service handover judging threshold TARGETRATR99PSTHD, TARGETRATHTHD.
Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover
This describes the time to trigger related to inter-RAT handovers. In coverage-oriented inter-RAT handovers, the time-to-trigger parameters include
time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D), time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A (TrigTime3A).
7/18/2011
Page 40 of 205
Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover

This describes the trigger hystereses for the 3A, 2D, 2F events, and inter-RAT handovers.
Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cells
This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verified when the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT
measurement. If the signal quality of a GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is in the verified
state in the time length stipulated by this parameter value, the system starts the inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM Cells
This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cell of which the BSIC is not verified when the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT
measurement. If the signal quality of a GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is in the nonverified state in the time length specified by this parameter, the system starts the inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover
This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode is adopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when
the quality of used frequency is poorer than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.
Inter-RAT Measurement Timer Length
This describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RAT cell is found (for example no 3A event report is
received or no periodic report meets the trigger conditions of inter-RAT handovers) till the timer expires, the system will stop the inter-RAT
measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RAT measurement.
Retry Period of 3A Event
This parameter specifies the 3A event retry period.
Maximum Retry Times of 3A Event
This parameter specifies the 3A event maximum retry times.
This describes the neighboring cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.
This describes the cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.

Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode

This describes the inter-RAT measurement report mode: the periodical report more or the event trigger mode.
ID
InterRATReportMode
Value Range
Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)
Physical Scope
Periodical_reporting indicates that the periodical reporting mode is used.
Event_trigger indicates that the event triggering mode is used.
Setting
The default value is Periodical_reporting.
There are two optional inter-RAT handover report modes in the RNC: event report and periodical report, which are selected through the switch of interRAT measurement report mode.
Event report:
To prevent ping-pong effect before and after inter-RAT handover, event 3A (the current used frequency quality is lower than the absolute threshold,
and the GSM cell level is higher than the other absolute threshold) is used as the trigger event for the decision on the origination of inter-RAT
handovers. To improve the handover success rate, the BSIC of the GSM cell where the 3A event is triggered must be decoded correctly by the UE. As
the 3A event has no event transfer period, the function of retrying after handover failures is not implemented, unless this cell can trigger 3A events
again.
Advantage: The event report can save signaling transmission resources and reduce processing load. In event report mode, the signal quality of the
current frequency and the signal quality of frequencies of other systems can be compared to avoid ping-pong handovers in a degree.
Disadvantage: The event report can be reported only once, because no event transfer period mechanism is available. If a handover fails, the periodical
retry can be triggered only by an internal timer. If the algorithm parameters are oriented to the cell level, the inter-frequency measurement
parameters need to be updated every time after the optimal cell is updated.
Periodical report:
When the quality of the GSM cell reported by UE is satisfied the requirement to trigger the inter-RAT handover, it starts the delay trigger timer. If
the quality of the GSM cell satisfies the requirement throughout the duration of the timer, the system starts the inter-RAT handover after the timeout.
If the handover fails, the system implements the handover again according to the periodical report of inter-RAT measurement.
Advantage: After a handover fails, the system can use the periodical reports to implement the handover for many times for a cell. The algorithm of the
7/18/2011
Page 41 of 205
periodical report can be flexibly extended. Parameters of the periodical reports are oriented to cells, so the RNC updates the parameters when
implementing internal handover decision and the system needs not to use signaling messages to inform UEs of the parameter change after handovers
occur.
Disadvantage: A large amount of signaling is needed. The air-interface load and signaling processing load increases.
The periodical report and event report have both advantages and disadvantages. Currently, the periodical report mode is most commonly used.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the inter-RAT measurement report mode.
For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the inter-RAT
measurement report mode.
Parent topic: Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
Inter-RAT Periodical Report Interval

This describes the measurement report interval when the periodical reporting mode is selected for the inter-RAT measurement.
ID
InterPeriodReportInterval
Value Range
Enum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000, D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000,
D64000)
Physical Scope
Enum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 3000 ms, 4000 ms, 6000 ms, 8000 ms, 12000 ms, 16000 ms, 20000 ms, 24000 ms,
28000 ms, 32000 ms, 64000 ms)
Setting
The default value is D1000, namely 1 s.
Because the GSM RSSI measurement period is 480 ms, the inter-RAT periodical report interval shall be longer than 480 ms. If InterPeriodReportInterval is
excessively high, the handover judging time shall be long, and handovers will become slower.
InterPeriodReportInterval is adjusted according to the configured GSM RSSI measurement compressed mode sequence. According to the current
configured GSM RSSI measurement compressed mode sequence, the RSSI measurement of eight GSM cells can be finished in 480 ms, so the RSSI
measurement of 16 GSM cells can be finished in 1000 ms. According to the protocol, there should be not more than 32 inter-RAT neighboring cells, so the
InterPeriodReportInterval can be set to 2000 ms if there are more than 16 neighboring GSM cells.
The higher InterPeriodReportInterval is, the fewer measurement reports are sent; but the increase of InterPeriodReportInterval will increase the risk of
call drop.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query InterPeriodReportInterval.
For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameter:
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify
InterPeriodReportInterval.

This describes the BSIC verify selection switch. The parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, report is allowed
7/18/2011
Page 42 of 205
only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells can be reported so long as the
report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.
ID
BSICVerify
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRED, NOT_REQUIRE)
Physical Scope
Required, not required
Setting
The default value is REQUIRED.
BSICVerify is valid for both periodical report mode and event report mode. To ensure the reliability of handovers, the system reports only the cells of which
the BSIC is correctly decoded, namely, the recommended value of BSICVerify is REQUIRED.
If BSICVerify is set to NOT_REQUIRE, handovers occur more easily. If BSICVerify is set to REQUIRED, handovers occur with higher reliability.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query BSICVerify.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify BSICVerify.
Event 3A Measurement Quantity

Parameter MEASQUANTITYOF3A is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.
ID
MEASQUANTITYOF3A
Value Range
MEASQUANTITYOF3A: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP, AUTO)
None.
Parameter Setting
The default value for MEASQUANTITYOF3A is AUTO.
If select CPICH_Ec/No then use the Ec/No measurement quantity for event 3A measurement. The physical unit is dB.
If select CPICH_RSCP then use the RSCP measurement quantity for event 3A measurement. The physical unit is dBm.
If select AUTO then use the Ec/N0 measurement quantity for event 3A measurement if RNC receives the Ec/No 2D firstly, or use the RSCP
measurement quantity for event 3A measurement if RNC receives the RSCP 2D firstly.

Set it based on the cell location in the network.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SET INTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST
INTERRATHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST
CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.
7/18/2011
Page 43 of 205
RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement events when RSCP is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
InterRATCSThd2DRSCP (Inter-RAT CS measure start RSCP THD)
INTERRATR99PSTHD2DRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start RSCP THD)
INTERRATHTHD2DRSCP (Inter-RAT H measure start RSCP THD)
InterRATCSThd2FRSCP (Inter-RAT CS measure stop RSCP THD)
INTERRATR99PSTHD2FRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure stop RSCP THD)
INTERRATHTHD2FRSCP (Inter-RAT H measure stop RSCP THD)
Value Range
-115 to -25
-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values are as follows:
InterRatCSThd2DRSCP is -100 dBm;

InterRatCSThd2FRSCP is -97 dBm;
INTERRATR99PSTHD2DRSCP and INTERRATHTHD2DRSCP is -110 dBm;
INTERRATR99PSTHD2FRSCP and INTERRATHTHD2FRSCP is -107dBm.
For the detailed descriptions, refer to Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement. For multiRAB services, use the
configuration of CS service if there exits CS service.
Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service types may have different requirements on the signal quality and
different inter-RAT handover policies to be adopted, the inter-RAT measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to CS, PS.
Set the event 2D thresholds to a greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To reduce
ping-pong start/stop of the compressed mode, increase appropriately the difference between the 2D and 2F thresholds.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHOCOV.
Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement event when Ec/No is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 (Inter-RAT CS measure start Ec/No THD)
InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure start Ec/No THD)
InterRATHThd2DEcN0 (Inter-RAT H measure start Ec/No THD)
INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0 (Inter-RAT CS measure stop Ec/No THD)
InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS measure stop Ec/No THD)
InterRATHThd2FEcN0 (Inter-RAT H measure stop Ec/No THD)
7/18/2011
Page 44 of 205
Value Range
-24 to 0
-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
Parameter Setting
The default values are as follows:
INTERRATCSTHD2DECN0 is -14dB;
INTERRATCSTHD2FECN0 is -12dB;
InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 and InterRATHThd2DEcN0 is -15dB;
InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 and InterRATHThd2FEcN0 is -13dB.
For the detailed descriptions, refer to Start or Stop Thresholds for the RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement. For multiRAB service, use the
configuration of CS service if there exists CS service.
Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service types may require different signal qualities and different interRAT handover policies, the inter-RAT measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to CS, PS and signaling.
Set the event 2D threshold to a greater value if the compressed mode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To eliminate
ping-pong start/stop of the compressed mode, increase appropriately the difference between the 2D and 2F thresholds.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHOCOV.
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST
Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds

Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judging threshold TARGETRATCSTHD and the inter-RAT PS service
handover judging threshold TARGETRATR99PSTHD, TARGETRATHTHD.
Parameter ID
TARGETRATCSTHD
TARGETRATR99PSTHD
TARGETRATHTHD
Value Range
0 to 63
-110 dBmto -48 dBm
(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 corresponds to -109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)
Parameter Setting
The default values are 16, namely, -95 dBm.
This set of parameters are used for inter-RAT coverage handover evaluation at the RNC side, that is, Tother_RATin the formula introduced below. It is the
absolute threshold of inter-RAT cell quality (RSSI) at the time of inter-RAT handover judging.
If the inter-RATquality in the inter-RAT measurement report obtained at a moment satisfies the following condition:
Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2
Then start the delay trigger timer Trigger-Timer, and handover judgment is made after the timer expires. If the inter-RAT quality satisfies the following
condition before the timer gets expired:
Mother_RAT + CIO < Tother_RAT - H/2
7/18/2011
Page 45 of 205
Then the timer stops timing, and the RNC goes on waiting for receiving of the inter-RAT measurement report.
Configure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handed over only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this
parameter can be increased properly, -85 dBm for example.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHOCOV.
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST
Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover

This describes the time to trigger related to inter-RAT handovers. In coverage-oriented inter-RAT handovers, the time-to-trigger parameters include timeto-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D), time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A (TrigTime3A).
ID
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
TrigTime3A
Value Range
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The default values of TrigTime3A, TrigTime2D, and TrigTime2F are D0, D320, and D1280 respectively.
The previous simulation results show that the hysteresis can effectively reduce the average number of handovers and mis-decisions and avoid unnecessary
handovers. UEs with different moving speeds vary in their responses to the event delay trigger value. UEs moving in a high speed are sensitive to the timeto-trigger value, while UEs moving in a slow speed are slow to the time-to-trigger value and cause fewer ping-pong handovers and wrong handovers.
Therefore, the time-to-trigger value can be set to a comparatively high value for the cells where most UEs move in a high speed and can be set to a
comparatively low value for the cells where most UEs move in a low speed. The time-to-trigger parameters need to be adjusted based on the actual network
statistics.
Table 1 lists the value ranges and recommended values of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-RAT handovers.
Table 1 List of time-to-trigger parameters related to inter-RAT hard handovers
Speed (km/h)
Range (ms)
640 to 1280
1280
50
240 to 640
640
120
240 to 640
640
640 to 1280
640

The higher the time-to-trigger values are, the lower the average handover frequency is; but the increase of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of
call drop.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the time-to-trigger values related to inter-RAT handovers.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the time-to-trigger
values related to inter-RAT handovers.
7/18/2011
Page 46 of 205

Hysteresis Related to the Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover

This describes the trigger hystereses for the 3A, 2D, 2F events, and inter-RAT handovers.
ID
Hystfor3A
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforInterRAT
Value Range
Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 to 29
Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 to 15
Physical Scope
Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 dB to 14.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 dB to 7.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Setting
The default values of Hystfor3A, Hystfor2D, and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB.
The default value of HystforInterRAT is 0, namely 0 dB.
HystforInterRAT aims to prevent the mis-decision caused by unexpected jitters of signals during inter-RAT handover decisions. HystforInterRAT and the
inter-RAT handover decision threshold determine whether to trigger inter-RAT handovers.
The simulation result shows that in a cell where the average moving speed of UEs is high, for example a cell that covers highways, HystforInterRAT can be
set to 1.5, because in the cell the hypsography is flat and there are few barriers, which causes a small shadow fading variation. In a cell where the average
moving speed of UEs is low, there are usually many tall buildings, so the shadow fading variation is comparatively big, and HystforInterRAT can be set to
3.0.
The settings of the hystereses related to coverage-based inter-RAT handover are similar to that of the hestereses related to coverage-based inter-frequency
handover. For details, refer to Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover.
The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, the more ping-pong effect is suppressed, and the more slowly the
handover algorithm responds to signal changes. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set to an excessively high value, the GSM cell to which the UE hands
over must have a good quality. Therefore, the conditions for triggering the inter-RAT handover decision are hard to be satisfied, and the call drop rate
increases.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters: use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query the interRAT handover hysteresis.
For the cell-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters: use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query,
and MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify the inter-RAT handover hysteresis.
Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cells

This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cells of which the BSIC is already verified when the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT
measurement. If the signal quality of a GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is in the verified state
in the time length stipulated by this parameter value, the system starts the inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
ID
TimeToTrigForVerify
Value Range
0 to 64000
7/18/2011
Page 47 of 205
Physical Scope
0 ms to 64000 ms
Setting
The default value is 0, namely that the handover is implemented immediately.
As described in the section about the inter-RAT handover decision threshold, the trigger condition for inter-RAT handover decision is as follows:
Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2
If the quality of the GSM neighboring cell meets the preceding condition, the system starts the trigger timer. The system then implements the handover
decision after timeout if the quality of the GSM neighboring cell always meets the preceding condition throughout the time length of the timer. The time
length of the trigger timer is called the delay trigger time.
The delay trigger time and hysteresis are used to prevent mis-decisions caused by signal jitters during inter-RAT handover decisions.
Considering that the UE is on the edge of the system, TimeToTrigForVerify should be set to a comparatively low value. Because the GSM cells of which the
BSIC is already verified usually have good performance, TimeToTrigForVerify should be set to 0, namely that the handover is implemented immediately.
The higher the time-to-trigger parameters are, the smaller the average number of handovers is, and the possibility of call drops increases.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query TimeToTrigForVerify.
TimeToTrigForVerify.
Time to Trigger for Non-Verified GSM Cells

This describes the delay trigger time of the GSM cell of which the BSIC is not verified when the periodical report mode is used for the inter-RAT
measurement. If the signal quality of a GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the conditions for the inter-RAT handover decision and is in the non-verified
state in the time length specified by this parameter, the system starts the inter-RAT handover to the GSM neighboring cell.
ID
TimeToTrigForNonVerify
Value Range
0 to 64000, 65535
Physical Scope
The physical scope of TimeToTrigForNonVerify is 0 ms to 64000 ms or 65535 ms. If TimeToTrigForNonVerify is set to 65535, the RNC does not allow
handovers to the GSM cells that are not verified.
Setting
The default value of TimeToTrigForNonVerify is 0, namely that the handovers to the non-verified GSM cells are not allowed.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and LST INTERRATHOCOV to query TimeToTrigForVerify.
TimeToTrigForVerify.
7/18/2011
Page 48 of 205

Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover

This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode is adopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the
quality of used frequency is poorer than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.
Parameter ID
Based on different inter-RAT measurement quantities in use and different borne services, this parameter can be categorized as follows:
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)

USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQHTHDECN0 (Inter-RAT H Used frequency trigger Ec/No THD)
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT CS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP (Inter-RAT R99 PS Used frequency trigger RSCP THD)
Value Range
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -24 to 0
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 to -25
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0, USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0 and USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -24 dB to 0 dB
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP, USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP and USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values for each parameter are as follows:
USEDFREQCSTHDECN0: -12 dB
USEDFREQR99PSTHDECN0: -13 dB
USEDFREQHTHDECN0: -13 dB
USEDFREQCSTHDRSCP: -97 dB
USEDFREQR99PSTHDRSCP: -107 dB
USEDFREQHTHDRSCP: -107 dB
Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

Only when the quality of the current used frequency satisfies QUsed TUsed - H3a/2 and the quality of target frequency satisfies Mother_RAT + CIO
Tother_RAT + H/2, delay the time for triggering the timer when the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-RAT measurement. A 3A event is report upon
expiry of the timer.
where,
QUsed: estimated quality of the UTRAN frequency currently used.

Tused: indicates the quality threshold for the inter-RAT frequency currently used.
Mother_RAT: indicates the inter-RAT (GSM RSSI) measurement results.
Tother_RAT: indicates the threshold for judging the inter-RAT handover.
Cell individual offset (CIO): indicates the offset set by inter-RAT cells.
H: indicates the hysteresis. The setting on the hysteresis reduces incorrect judgement caused by jitter signals.
When the cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and is lower than the threshold defined by this parameter, infer that the current frequency cannot
better satisfy the coverage requirement of current service. The event 2F indicates that the current frequency quality is restored. Therefore, this parameter
should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F or equal to the threshold of event 2D.
For composite services, use the parameters configured for CS services.
Higher values of these parameters get event 3A to be more easily triggered. When the value of this parameter is too high, the UE may perform handover
even when the signal quality is good in current system.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SET INTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST
CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modify it through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.
7/18/2011
Page 49 of 205

This describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RAT cell is found (for example no 3A event report is received or
no periodic report meets the trigger conditions of inter-RAT handovers) till the timer expires, the system will stop the inter-RAT measurement, disables the
compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RAT measurement.
ID
InterRATMeasTime
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer.
1 to 512 means 1 s to 512 s.
Setting
The default value is 60, namely 60 s. When setting the thresholds, consider the following factors:
InterRATMeasTime aims to prevent that the handover conditions are not available and the compressed mode is kept for a long time when the UE does not
move or is moving in a low speed. The service quality is adversely affected and the total available capacity decreases if the compressed mode is kept for a
long time.
Most inter-RAT handovers can be finished in 60 s.
If InterRATMeasTime is excessively low, the UE cannot finish inter-RAT handovers.

If InterRATMeasTime is excessively high, it cannot help improve the service quality.
For the acutal network, statistics can be made to obtain the delay for a successful inter-RAT handover to get a proper value of InterRATMeasTime that
satisfies most UEs.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented inter-RAT handover algorithm parameter:
Use SET INTERRATHOCOV to set and use LST INTERRATHOCOV to query InterRATMeasTime.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to add, use LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV to query, and use MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV to modify
InterRATMeasTime.
Retry Period of 3A Event

This parameter specifies the 3A event retry period.
ID
PeriodFor3A
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3A event, the RNC periodically retries to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause.
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 50 of 205

The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource of WCDMA cell will be increased.
Related Commands
INTERRATHOCOV.
Maximum Retry Times of 3A Event

This parameter specifies the 3A event maximum retry times.
ID
AmntOfRpt3A
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
Setting
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3A event, the RNC periodically retries to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause for
the 3A event maximum retry times. If the handover succeeds or the new 3A event report is received, the periodically retry process is stopped.
The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource of WCDMA cell will be increased.
Related Commands
INTERRATHOCOV.

This describes the neighboring cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.
ID
CIOOffset
Value Range
50 to 50
Physical Scope
50 dB to 50 dB
Setting
handover decision. CIOOffset plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm..
7/18/2011
Page 51 of 205

The higher the sum is, the more easily inter-RAT handovers occur.
Related Commands
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify CIOOffset.

This describes the cell individual offset for inter-RAT handovers.
ID
CIO
Value Range
50 to 50
Physical Scope
50 dB to 50 dB
Setting
handover decision. CIO plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the handover algorithm..
The higher the sum is, the more easily inter-RAT handovers occur.
Related Commands
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify CIO.
Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters

The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
Inter-RAT service handover switch
OFF
Set: ADD CELLHOCOMM
Cell
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
Query: LST CELLHOCOMM

Modify: MOD CELLHOCOMM
Hystfor3C
Hysteresis of event 3C
0 dB
TrigTime3C
Time-to-Trigger for event 3C
D640 (640 ms)
BSICVerify
BSIC verify selection switch
Required
TARGETRATCSTHD
Non-Coverage-Based inter-RAT handover

judging thresholds
21, that is, -90

dBm
InterRATNCovHOPSThd
For RNC
RNC/Cell
Set or modify: SET

INTERRATHONCOV
Query: LST INTERRATHONCOV
For Cell
InterRATHOAttempts
Inter-RAT handover max attempt times
16 times
InterRATMeasTime
Inter-RAT measure timer length
60 s
SNDLDINFO2GSMIND
Switch used to send load information to 2G
ON
NCOVHOON2GLDIND
Switch for non-coverage based handover

according to 2G load information.
ON
Query: LST
CELLINTERRATHONCOV
10
CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD
2G load threshold by inter-rat handover in

CS-domain
80 %
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERRATHONCOV
Set: ADD
CELLINTERRATHONCOV
7/18/2011
Page 52 of 205
11
PSHOOut2GloadThd
2G load threshold by inter-rat handover in

PS-domain
60 %
12
PeriodFor3C
Retry period of 3C event
2000 ms
13
AmntOfRpt3C
Maximum retry times of 3C event
14
UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A Measurement quantity of 3A frequency in

QoS handover
CPICH_RSCP
15
DlRscpQosHyst
Frequency delay of downlink RSCP QoS
4 dB
16
DLQosMcTimerLen
DownLink Qos measurement timer length
20 s
17
ULQosMcTimerLen
UpLink Qos measurement timer length
20 s
Set: SET QOSHO
RNC
Query: LST QOSHO
Inter-RAT Service Handover Switch

This describes the inter-RAT service handover switches. The parameters indicate whether the cell allows the triggering of CS and PS service
handovers.
This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based on coverage.
This describes the time to trigger the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based on coverage.
This describes the BSIC verify selection switch, which is used to control the non-coverage-based inter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require,
the reporting is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells
can be reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.
Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision Thresholds
This describes the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision thresholds: InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts
This describes the maximum number of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover attempts.
This describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RAT cell is found, for example no 3C event report is
received, till the timer expires, the system will stop inter-RAT measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another
inter-RAT measurement.
Switch used to Send Load Information to 2G
This is a switch used to send load information to 2G, without direct impact on network performance. When it is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell
load information to the GSM during the non-coverage based system relocation in or out process. When it is set to OFF, the RNC does not send UMTS
cell load information to the GSM during the system relocation in or out process.
Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G Load Information
This describes the switch for non-coverage based handover according to 2G load information. When it is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage
based system relocation out process if the GSM cell load exceeds the CS/PS dormain relocate GSM load Threshold.
2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-Domain
This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.
2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domain
This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.
Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS Handover
This parameter is used to configure the used frequency measurement quantity for the 3A event.

Inter-RAT Service Handover Switch

This describes the inter-RAT service handover switches. The parameters indicate whether the cell allows the triggering of CS and PS service handovers.
ID
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)
Physical Scope
Open, close
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 53 of 205
The default value is OFF.

The service handover is configured refers to the service handover attribute of each service and related parameters at network side. Once the service is set
up, the related measurement is immediately triggered and inter-RAT handover is performed.
The two switches need to be opened only when the service handover function is necessary. By default, they are closed.
The inter-RAT service handover switches are set on the basis of the actual network handover strategy.
Related Commands
For the cell-oriented handover parameters:
Use ADD CELLHOCOMM to set, MOD CELLHOCOMM to modify, and LST CELLHOCOMM to query the inter-RAT service handover switches.
This describes the trigger hysteresis of the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based on coverage.
ID
Hystfor3C
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
Setting
The 3C event means that the quality of a GSM cell is higher than an absolute threshold.
The 3C event is used for the inter-RAT load handovers and service handovers. When a GSM cell satisfies the following condition, the system triggers the 3C
event and records the GSM cell in the 3C event trigger list. The 3C event is not repeatedly reported for the cells in the 3C event trigger list.
MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT TotherRAT + H3C/2
(prescribed in the TS25.331 protocol)
Where,
H3C represents the hysteresis for the 3C event, namely Hystfor3C.

TotherRAT represents the threshold for triggering the reporting of the 3C event of inter-RAT cells, namely InterRATNCovHOCSThd or
InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
When a cell in the 3C event trigger list satisfies the following condition:
MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT TotherRAT - H3C/2
(prescribed in 3GPP TS25.331)
the cell is deleted from the 3C event trigger list.
The hysteresis aims to avoid mis-decisions that are caused by transient fluctuations of signals. For details, refer to Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency
Handover.
The higher the hysteresis is, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability is, and the more ping-pong effect is suppressed. In this case, the
handover algorithm responds to signal changes more slowly. If Hystfor3C is set to an excessively high value, the GSM cell to which the UE hands over must
have a good quality. Therefore, the conditions for triggering the inter-RAT handover decision are hard to be satisfied, and the call drop rate increases.
Related Commands
For the RNC-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
7/18/2011
Page 54 of 205
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query Hystfor3C.

For the cell-oriented non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover algorithm parameters:
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify Hystfor3C.

This describes the time to trigger the 3C event in inter-RAT handovers that are not based on coverage.
ID
TrigTime3C
Value Range
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The delay trigger time aims to avoid the occasional triggering of excessive event reports for a measurement result. Considering that the period of the
physical layer of UE reporting to Layer 3 is 480 ms, TrigTime3C is set to 640, namely that the system reports the 3C event only when at least two continuous
measurement reports satisfy the condition for triggering the 3C event. The value of TrigTime3C can be optimized based on the actual radio environment.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query TrigTime3C.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify TrigTime3C.

This describes the BSIC verify selection switch, which is used to control the non-coverage-based inter-RAT measurement report. If it is set to Require, the
reporting is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded. If it is set to Not_Require, all the measured cells can be
reported so long as the report conditions are available, no matter whether their BSICs are correctly decoded or not.
ID
BSICVerify
Value Range
REQUIRED, NOT_REQUIRE
Physical Scope
Required, not required
Setting
The default value is REQUIRED.
The non-coverage-based handovers require a lower timeliness but a higher handover success rate of handovers, so the recommended value of BSICVerify is
REQUIRED to ensure the reliability of handovers.
7/18/2011
Page 55 of 205
If BSICVerify is set to NOT_REQUIRE, handovers occur more easily. If BSICVerify is set to REQUIRED, handovers occur with higher reliability.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query BSICVerify.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify BSICVerify.
Non-Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Decision Thresholds

This describes the non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision thresholds: InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
ID
InterRATNCovHOCSThd
InterRATNCovHOPSThd
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
110 dBm to 48 dBm
(0 represents a value lower than 110 dBm; 1 represents 110 dBm; 2 represents 109 dBm; ... 63 represents 48 dBm.)
Setting
The default value is 21, namely 90 dBm.
For the decision formula, refer to Hysteresis of Event 3C.
The thresholds for coverage-based handovers and non-coverage-based handovers are distinguished to flexibly control handovers with different aims. The
non-coverage-based handovers do not require a high timeliness but require a high success rate and good link quality before and after the handovers, so the
non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover decision threshold needs to be set to a high value.
For multi-RAB services, use the parameter configuration of CS service if CS services exist.
The values of inter-RAT handover decision thresholds vary according to the handover policy. To have UEs hand over only to the GSM cells with high
quality, you can set the inter-RAT handover decision threshold to a comparatively high value, for example 85.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify
InterRATNCovHOCSThd and InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
Maximum Number of Inter-RAT Handover Attempts

This describes the maximum number of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover attempts.
ID
InterRATHoAttempts
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 56 of 205
1 to 16
Physical Scope
1 to 16 attempts
Setting
An inter-RAT handover involves many network nodes and is a complicated process, so the delay of the inter-RAT handover is long and the failure rate is
comparatively high. Too many handover failures affect the call quality and increase the processing load of the network, so InterRATHoAttempts can be set
to a proper value to limit handover failures. InterRATHoAttempts and InterRATMeasTime help reduce unnecessary inter-RAT measurement (compressed
mode) by limiting the number of handovers and time of inter-RAT measurement respectively.
The number of inter-RAT handovers includes the number of attempts to hand over to the same cell and the number of attempts to hand over to different
cells. If the penalty is introduced to the inter-RAT handovers, namely that the system prohibits handovers to the cells to which handovers have failed for a
period. The penalty does not prohibit the UE from hand over to other cells.
InterRATHoAttempts can be set to 16 at the test stage and set to 1 to 3 in the actual application.
The higher InterRATHoAttempts is, the higher the probability is for the UE performs inter-RAT handovers.
The lower InterRATHoAttempts is, the smaller influence is on the network quality. Unless in the test process, InterRATHoAttempts needs to be set to
a comparatively low value.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query InterRATHoAttempts.
InterRATHoAttempts.

This describes the effective time length of the inter-RAT measurement. If no proper inter-RAT cell is found, for example no 3C event report is received, till
the timer expires, the system will stop inter-RAT measurement, disables the compressed mode, and waits for the triggering of another inter-RAT
measurement.
ID
InterRATMeasTime
Value Range
0 to 512
Physical Scope
0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer. 1 to 512 means 1 s to 512 s.
Setting
InterRATMeasTime aims to prevent that the compressed mode is kept for a long time due to the handover conditions are not available when the UE does
not move or is moving in a low speed. The service quality is adversely affected and the total available capacity decreases if the compressed mode is kept for a
long time.
Most inter-RAT handovers can be finished in 60 s.
The compressed mode of coverage-based inter-RAT measurement can be closed by the 2F event, while the compressed mode of non-coverage-based interRAT measurement cannot be closed by the 2F event but by the measurement timer. Therefore, do not set the timer of the non-coverage-based inter-RAT
measurement to 0 if possible.
If InterRATMeasTime is excessively low, the UE cannot implement inter-RAT handovers.

If InterRATMeasTime is excessively high, it has no effect on improvement of the service quality.
7/18/2011
Page 57 of 205
For the actual network, statistics can be made to obtain the delay for a successful inter-RAT handover to get a proper value of InterRATMeasTime that
satisfies most UEs.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query InterRATMeasTime.
InterRATMeasTime.
Switch used to Send Load Information to 2G

This is a switch used to send load information to 2G, without direct impact on network performance. When it is set to ON, the RNC sends UMTS cell load
information to the GSM during the non-coverage based system relocation in or out process. When it is set to OFF, the RNC does not send UMTS cell load
information to the GSM during the system relocation in or out process.
ID
SNDLDINFO2GSMIND
Value Range
OFF, ON
Physical Scope
OFF, ON
Setting
The default value is ON.
This parameter should be used with the WCDMA and GSM load balancing function.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query SNDLDINFO2GSMIND.
SNDLDINFO2GSMIND.
Switch for Non-Coverage Based Handover according to 2G Load Information

This describes the switch for non-coverage based handover according to 2G load information. When it is set to ON, the RNC stops the non-coverage based
system relocation out process if the GSM cell load exceeds the CS/PS dormain relocate GSM load Threshold.
ID
NCOVHOON2GLDIND
Value Range
OFF, ON
Physical Scope
OFF, ON
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 58 of 205

When the switch is enabled, the loading of GSM network is taken into account in the WCDMA and GSM load balancing function, thus avoiding too much
impact on the GSM network.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query NCOVHOON2GLDIND.
NCOVHOON2GLDIND.
2G Load Threshold by Inter-Rat Handover in CS-Domain

This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.
ID
CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
The default value is 80, namely 80%.
This parameter defines the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in CS-domain.
The higher the parameter is, more easily to handover, but take much impact on the GSM cell load.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD.
CSHOOUT2GLOADTHD.
2G Load Threshold by Inter-RAT Handover in PS-domain

This parameter specifies the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.
ID
PSHOOut2GloadThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
7/18/2011
Page 59 of 205
Setting
This parameter defines the GSM load threshold by inter-RAT handover in PS-domain.
The higher the parameter is, more easily to handover, but take much impact on the GSM cell load.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query PSHOOut2GloadThd.
PSHOOut2GloadThd.

ID
PeriodFor3C
Value Range
1 to 64
Physical Scope
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3C event, the RNC periodically retries to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause.
Setting
The lower the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource of WCDMA cell will be increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query PeriodFor3C.
Use ADD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to add, LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV to query, and MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV to modify PeriodFor3C.

ID
AmntOfRpt3C
Value Range
0 to 63
7/18/2011
Page 60 of 205
Physical Scope
Setting
If the RNC fails to handover to all the target cells of the 3C event, the RNC periodically retries to launch handover to the target cells failed by load cause for
the 3C event maximum retry times. If the handover succeeds or the new 3C event report is received, the periodically retry process is stopped.
The higher the parameter isthe more easily handover to GSM cellbut the processing resource of WCDMA cell will be increased.
Related Commands
Use SET INTERRATHONCOV to set and LST INTERRATHONCOV to query AmntOfRpt3C.
AmntOfRpt3C.
Measurement Quantity of 3A Frequency in QoS Handover

This parameter is used to configure the used frequency measurement quantity for the 3A event.
ID
UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A
Value Range
CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
Physical Scope
CPICH_Ec/No, CPICH_RSCP
Setting
The default value is CPICH_RSCP.
The precondition is that the UE is moving to the edge of the cell. If there is intra-frequency cell, the Ec/No changes faster than RSCP, so the quality of the
cell should be measured by Ec/No. If there is no intra-frequency cell, the RSCP changes faster than Ec/No, the quality of the cell should be measured by
RSCP. If the measurement quantity is improper, handovers may not be delayed, and thus call drop occurs.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSHO to set and LST QOSHO to query UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A.
Blind Handover Management Parameters

This describes the blink handover management parameters.
Table 1 List of blind handover management parameters
Serial No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
BlindHoFlag
Blind handover flag
OFF
For inter-frequency handovers:
NCell
Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELL

Query: LST INTERFREQNCELL
2
BlindHOPrio
Blind handover priority
7/18/2011
DRDEcN0Threshhold
Ec/N0 threshold for direct retry
Page 61 of 205
-9 dB
Modify: MOD INTERFREQNCELL

For inter-RAT handovers:
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
Query: LST GSMNCELL
Blind Handover Flag

This describes the blind handover flag, which indicates whether the blind handover is performed. In a blind handover, the UE can directly hands over
to the neighboring cell without any measurement.
Blind Handover Priority
This describes the blind handover priority. If BlindHOFlag is TRUE, BlindHOPrio can be used to appoint the blind handover priority for the
neighboring cell.
Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct Retry
In DRD, this parameter is used to judge whether the quality condition of blind handover is met.

Blind Handover Flag

This describes the blind handover flag, which indicates whether the blind handover is performed. In a blind handover, the UE can directly hands over to the
neighboring cell without any measurement.
ID
BlindHoFlag
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is FALSE.
For the concentric cells with different frequencies, BlindHoFlag can be set to TRUE.
Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies. It may affect KPI performance concerning the cells if the blind handover is allowed in
related cells. Especially the emergency blind handovers have more impact.
Related Commands
For the inter-frequency handovers:
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify BlindHoFlag.
For the inter-RAT handovers:
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify BlindHoFlag.
Parent topic: Blind Handover Management Parameters
Blind Handover Priority

This describes the blind handover priority. If BlindHOFlag is TRUE, BlindHOPrio can be used to appoint the blind handover priority for the neighboring
cell.
ID
BlindHOPrio
Value Range
0 to 30
7/18/2011
Page 62 of 205
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
Table 1 lists the meanings of different blind handover priorities.
Table 1 List of blind handover priority sets
Bind Handover Priority Set
Priority
Cell Type
Inter-frequency emergency blind handover
0 to 30
Inter-frequency cell
Inter-frequency non-emergency blind handover
0 to 15
Inter-frequency cell
Inter-RAT emergency blind handover
0 to 30
Inter-RAT cell
Inter-RAT non-emergency blind handover
0 to 15
Inter-RAT cell
The configuration of the non-emergency blind handover priority (015) of cells must guarantee a reasonable handover success rate and avoid the high call
drop rate. The scenarios of the non-emergency blind handover priority are concentric cells with different frequencies and macro cells that act as the
neighboring cells of micro cells.
The cells with priority 1630 have a lower requirement on the blind handover success rate, because the customer satisfaction is not directly affected. The
scenarios of the cells with priority 1630 are the cells in the UE's moving direction and the inter-frequency cells with a high handover probability.
The specific value in the value ranges is not strictly required, because it is used to flexibly control the preferable target cells of blind handovers. For the
inter-frequency blind handover cells, you can randomly select a value for the handover priority between 0 and 10, while you must carefully select a value
range (either 015 or 1630, which indicates non-emergency inter-frequency blind handovers or emergency inter-frequency blind handovers) at first.
If the blind handovers are enabled, the traffic statistics indexes, such as the inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover success rate and call drop rate, are
affected to a certain degree. Especially the emergency blind handovers have more impact.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify BlindHOPrio.
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify BlindHOPrio.
Ec/N0 Threshold for Direct Retry

In DRD, this parameter is used to judge whether the quality condition of blind handover is met.
ID
DRDEcN0Threshhold
Value Range
24 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is -18, namely -9 dB.
This threshold is the minimum Ec/N0 value required for normal communications of UE. In selecting the candidate cell of DRD, the cell whose Ec/N0 value is
smaller than this threshold of inter-frequency cells is filtered out.
This parameter specifies the domain for inter-frequency blind handover. The higher the parameter, more easily to blind handover.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 63 of 205
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify DRDEcN0Threshhold.
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify DRDEcN0Threshhold.
Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters

This describes the cell selection and reselection parameters.
Table 1 List of cell selection and reselection parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
IdleQhyst1s
Measurement hysteresis parameters
Qhyst1s: 2 (4 dB)
Set: ADD CELLSELRESEL
Cell
Qhyst2s: 1 (2 dB)
Query: LST
CELLSELRESEL
IdleQhyst2s
ConnQhyst1s
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
ConnQhyst2s
2
IdleQoffset1sn
Load level offsets
0 dB
IdleQoffset2sn
For intra-frequency cells:

Set: ADD
INTRAFREQNCELL
ConnQoffset1sn
Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCELL
ConnQoffset2sn
Modify: MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL
Qoffset1sn
For inter-frequency cells:

Set: ADD
INTERFREQNCELL
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
For inter-RAT cells:
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
Query: LST GSMNCELL
3
Qqualmin
Minimum quality criterion
18 dB
Qrxlevmin
Minimum access level
58, namely 115 dBm
IdleSintrasearch
Cell reselection start thresholds
IdleSintrasearch and ConnSintrasearch:

5, namely 10 dB
ConnSintrasearch
IdleSintersearch
IdleSintersearch and ConnSintersearch:

4, namely 8 dB
ConnSintersearch
SsearchRat: 2, namely 4 dB
Set: ADD CELLSELRESEL

Query: LST
CELLSELRESEL
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
SsearchRat
6
Treselections
Reselection hysteresis time
1s
Qrxlevmin
Minimum access level for GSM cells
58, namely 115 dBm
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
NCell
Query: LST GSMNCELL

8
Qsearch_I
Level threshold for 2G MS in idle mode

to search for 3G cells
7, namely always
FDD_Qoffset
3G cell reselection signal level offset
0 dB
N/A
GSM
7/18/2011
10
FDD_Qmin
3G cell reselection signal level threshold
Page 64 of 205
10 dB
Measurement Hysteresis Parameters

This describes the measurement hysteresis parameters: measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s). The
measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s) are used for the UE to measure the service cell CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s)
and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively. IdleQhyst1s and IdleQhyst2s are used in the idle state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in the
connecting state.
Cell Reselection Offset
This describes the cell offset used for cell selection and reselection. In the processes of cell selection and cell reselection, the offset of the cells that use
the CPICH Ec/No measurement value is QOffset2sn, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH RSCP measurement value is QOffset1sn.
Minimum Quality Criterion
This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the cell only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is higher
than this threshold.
Minimum Access Level
This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in the cell only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is higher
than this threshold.
Cell Reselection Start Thresholds
This describes the cell reselection start thresholds: intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Sintrasearch), inter-frequency cell reselection start
threshold (Sintersearch), and inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat). IdleSintrasearch and IdleSintersearch are used in idle state.
ConnSintrasearch and ConnSintersearch are used in connecting state.
Reselection Hysteresis Time
This describes reselection hysteresis time. If the quality of signals of a cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is better than that of the current cell
where the UE is residing throughout the reselection hysteresis time, the UE reselects the cell as the next residing cell.
Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT Cells
This describes the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cells, such as the GSM, DCS, or PCS cells. A UE can reside in a cell only when the
signal strength measured by the UE is higher than the threshold.
Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for 3G Cells
This describes the signal level threshold for which a GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for 3G cells.
Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell Reselection
This describes the signal level offset for 3G cell reselection. A 3G cell can be reselected when the average signal level of the target 3G cell is higher than
that of the current serving cell by at least the amount defined by FDD_Qosffset.
Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell Reselection
This describes the signal level threshold for 3G cell reselection. Only when the signal level in the target 3G cell is higher than the serving cell by at
least the amount defined by FDD_Qmin, the target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.

Measurement Hysteresis Parameters

This describes the measurement hysteresis parameters: measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s). The measurement
hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s) are used for the UE to measure the service cell CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s) and CPICH Ec/No
(Qhyst2s) respectively. IdleQhyst1s and IdleQhyst2s are used in the idle state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in the connecting state.
ID
IdleQhyst1s
IdleQhyst2s
ConnQhyst1s
ConnQhyst2s
Value Range
0 to 20, 255
Physical Scope
When the value of measurement hysteresis is 255, the measurement hysteresis is invalid.
Setting
The default value of Qhyst1s is 2, namely 4 dB. The default value of Qhyst2s is 1, namely 2 dB.
Qhyst2s is an optional configuration. If Qhyst2s is not configured, the value of the measurement hysteresis is that of Qhyst1s.
According to the R rule, the measurement value of the current serving cell plus the hysteresis is used in the cell reselection sequencing. The value of the
measurement hysteresis is related to the slow fading feature of the area where the cell is.
The measurement hysteresis aims to prevent the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection, which is caused by the slow fading when the UE is on the edge of the
cell. The ping-pong effect may trigger frequent location updates (idle mode), URA updates (URA_PCH), or cell updates (CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH), and
thus increase the load of network signaling and the consumption of UE batteries.
Set a proper measurement hysteresis to reduce as much as possible effect of the slow fading as well as ensuring timely cell updates of the UE. According to
7/18/2011
Page 65 of 205
the CPICH RSCP emulation report of inter-frequency hard handovers, the measurement hysteresis ranges 4 dBm to 5 dBm and is set to 4 dBm by default
when the slow fading variance is 8 dB and the relative distance is 20 m.
In the cells the slow fading variance is big and the average moving speed of UEs is low, increase the measurement hysteresis to reduce the ping-pong effect of
the cell reselection.
In the cells where the slow fading variance is low and the average moving speed of UEs is high, for example the suburbs and countryside, reduce the
measurement hysteresis to guarantee timely location updates of UEs.
The higher the measurement hysteresis is, the less likely it is for various types of cell reselections to occur, and the better the slow fading resistance
capability is, but the slower the system reacts to the environment changes.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD CELLSELRESEL to modify the measurement hysteresis.
Parent topic: Cell Selection and Reselection Parameters
Cell Reselection Offset

This describes the cell offset used for cell selection and reselection. In the processes of cell selection and cell reselection, the offset of the cells that use the
CPICH Ec/No measurement value is QOffset2sn, the offset of the cells that use the CPICH RSCP measurement value is QOffset1sn.
ID
IdleQoffset1sn
IdleQoffset2sn
ConnQoffset1sn
ConnQoffset2sn
Value Range
50 to 50
Physical Scope
50 dB to 50 dB
Setting
IdleQoffset1sn and IdleQoffset2sn are used in idle state. ConnQoffset1sn and ConnQoffset2sn are used in connecting state. ConnQoffset1sn and
ConnQoffset2sn are valid only when SIB12Ind is TRUE, namely that there are SIB12 system messages. In addition, in the inter-RAT cell selection and
reselection processes, there is no QOffset2sn but only QOffset1sn, and there is no difference as to Idle and Conn.
It is the offset for the CPICH measurement value of neighboring cells. QOffset1sn is used for the RSCP measurement. The measurement value of
neighboring cells minus the offset is used in the cell reselection sequencing. QOffset2sn is used for the Ec/No measurement. The measurement value of
neighboring cells minus the offset is used in the cell reselection sequencing.
The cell reselection offset plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the cell selection and reselection algorithm. It is configured by network planners
according to the actual situation.
The higher the cell reselection offset is, the lower probability that nearby cells are selected.
The lower the cell reselection offset is, the higher probability that nearby cells are selected.
Related Commands
For the intra-frequency cell selection and reselection:
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.
For the inter-frequency cell selection and reselection:
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set, LST INTERFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.
For the inter-RAT cell selection and reselection:
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify the cell reselection offset.
7/18/2011
Page 66 of 205

Minimum Quality Criterion

This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the cell only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is higher than
this threshold.
ID
Qqualmin
Value Range
24 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
For the FDD mode, the definition of cell selection S rule in 3GPP 25.304 is as follows:
Srxlev > 0 and Squal > 0
Where,
Squal = Qqualmeas Qqualmin
Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas Qrxlevmin Pcompensation
Qqualmeas is the quality measured for the cell and is represented by CPICH Ec/NO.
Qrxlevmeas is RSCP of CPICH.
Qrxlevmin is the minimum pilot signal reception power of the current cell.
Pcompensation = max (UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH P_MAX, 0)
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the maximum uplink transmit power when the UE accesses the cell, namely MaxAllowedULTxPower.
P_MAX is the maximum radio frequency output power of a UE.
The higher Qqualmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
The lower Qqualmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell, but it is possible that the UE cannot receive the system messages that are sent
through the PCCPCH.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD CELLSELRESEL to modify Qqualmin.
Minimum Access Level

This describes the minimum access threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in the cell only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is higher than
this threshold.
ID
Qrxlevmin
Value Range
58 to 13
Physical Scope
58 means 115 dBm; 57 means 113 dBm; ; 13 means 25 dBm.
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 67 of 205
For the definition of Qrxlevmin, refer to Minimum Quality Criterion.

The settings of Qrxlevmin and Qqualmin need to be considered comprehensively.
The higher Qrxlevmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
The lower Qrxlevmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell. But if Qrxlevmin is excessively low, it is possible that the UE cannot receive the
system messages that are sent through the PCCPCH.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD CELLSELRESEL to modify Qrxlevmin.
Cell Reselection Start Thresholds

This describes the cell reselection start thresholds: intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Sintrasearch), inter-frequency cell reselection start
threshold (Sintersearch), and inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat). IdleSintrasearch and IdleSintersearch are used in idle state.
ConnSintrasearch and ConnSintersearch are used in connecting state.
ID
IdleSintrasearch
IdleSintersearch
ConnSintrasearch
ConnSintersearch
SsearchRat
Value Range
16 to 10
Physical Scope
Setting
The default values of IdleSintrasearch and ConnSintrasearch are 5, namely 10 dB.

The default values of IdleSintersearch and ConnSintersearch are 4, namely 8 dB.
The default value of Ssearchrat is 2, namely 4 dB.
In 3GPP 25.304, the cell reselection start threshold is defined as follows:

1. If Sx <= Sintrasearch, the UE implements the intra-frequency measurement and starts the intra-frequency cell reselection.
2. If Sx <= Sintersearch, the UE implements the inter-frequency measurement and starts the inter-frequency cell reselection.
3. If Sx <= SserachRAT, the UE implements the inter-RAT measurement and starts the inter-RAT cell reselection.
Where, Sx = UE measurement value Qqualmin.
When the UE detects that the quality of serving cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is lower than the minimum quality standard (Qqualmin) plus the
cell reselection start threshold, the UE starts the cell reselection process.
The intra-frequency cell reselection has a priority higher than the inter-frequency cell reselection and inter-RAT cell reselection, the intra-frequency cell
reselection start threshold should be higher than the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold and inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold.
If the cell reselection threshold is set to a comparatively high value, the UE may frequently start cell reselections, and the battery of the UE may be
largely consumed.
If the cell reselection threshold is set to a comparatively low value, it is difficult for cell reselections to be started, and the UE may not timely reside in
the cells with good quality, affecting the quality of communication between the UTRAN and the UE.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD CELLSELRESEL to modify the cell reselection thresholds.
7/18/2011
Page 68 of 205
Reselection Hysteresis Time

This describes reselection hysteresis time. If the quality of signals of a cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is better than that of the current cell where
the UE is residing throughout the reselection hysteresis time, the UE reselects the cell as the next residing cell.
ID
Treselections
Value Range
0 to 31
Physical Scope
0 s to 31 s
Setting
Treselections prevents ping-pong reselections between cells.
NOTE:
0 corresponds to the default value that is prescribed in the protocol, and does not mean 0 s.
When setting Treselections, comply with the following principles:
1. Ensure that the UE can reselect a cell when crossing the non-soft-switch area of the cell and that the UE timely performs location updates, cell
updates, or URA updates when necessary.
2. Ensure that the UE does not reselect a cell when it is in the soft-switch area of the cell. In this way, the unnecessary location updates, cell updates, and
URA updates are avoided.
3. When setting Treselections, consider the difference between cells that cover different areas, for example the cells covering highways and cells covering
densely populated areas. Treselections in densely populated areas can be set to a high value and Treselections in the areas where the average moving
speed of UEs is high can be set to a low value.
If Treselections is set to a comparatively low value, the ping-pong reselections may be caused.
If Treselections is set to a comparatively high value, the cell reselection delay may become excessively high, and thus cell reselections may be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST CELLSELRESEL to query, and MOD CELLSELRESEL to modify Treselections.
Minimum Access Level of Inter-RAT Cells

This describes the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cells, such as the GSM, DCS, or PCS cells. A UE can reside in a cell only when the signal
strength measured by the UE is higher than the threshold.
ID
Qrxlevmin
Value Range
58 to 13
Physical Scope
58 means 115 dBm; 57 means 113 dBm; ; 13 means 25 dBm.
Setting
Similar to the S rule, mobile stations in the GSM, DCS, or PCS system also need to meet a path loss standard to reside in a GSM, DCS, or PCS cell. The
standard requires that the factor (C1) of the path loss rule should be higher than 0. C1 is defined as follows:
C1 = (A Max (B, 0))
7/18/2011
Page 69 of 205
Where,
A = RLA_C RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN;
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH P
For the DCS 1800 system
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH + POWER OFFSET P;

RLA_C: The measured value of average received signal strength
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: The minimum signal strength needed by the access system, namely Qrxlevmin
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH: The maximum allowed transmit power when the UE accesses the system
POWER OFFSET: The power offset parameter of UEs in the DCS 1800 system; and is used with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH
P: The maximum radio frequency output power of a UE
The higher Qrxlevmin is, the more difficult it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
The lower Qrxlevmin is, the easier it is for the UE to reside in the cell.
But if Qrxlevmin is excessively low, it is possible that the UE cannot receive the system messages and paging messages of the cell.
Related Commands
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set, LST GSMNCELL to query, and MOD GSMNCELL to modify Qrxlevmin.
Signal Level Threshold for MS in 2G Idle Mode to Search for 3G Cells

This describes the signal level threshold for which a GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for 3G cells.
ID
Qsearch_I
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
If the threshold ranges 0 to 6, the GSM MS starts searching for 3G cells when the signal level is lower than the threshold.
If the threshold ranges 8 to 14, the GSM MS starts searching for 3G cells when the signal level is higher than the threshold.
If the threshold is 7, the GSM MS is always searching for 3G cells.
If the threshold is 15, the GSM MS never searches for the 3G cells.
0 = 98 dBm, 1 = 94 dBm, ..., 6 = 74 dBm, 7 = (always), 8 = 78 dBm, 9 = 74 dBm, ..., 14 = 54 dBm, 15 = (never)
Setting
The default value is 7, which indicates that the GSM MS in idle mode always searches for 3G cells.
The setting of this parameter depends on the customer policy. The 3G cell is preferable during the interoperation of 3G and 2G.
Related Commands
The parameter is invalid in the 3G network.
Signal Level Offset for 3G Cell Reselection

This describes the signal level offset for 3G cell reselection. A 3G cell can be reselected when the average signal level of the target 3G cell is higher than that
of the current serving cell by at least the amount defined by FDD_Qosffset.
ID
FDD_Qoffset
Value Range
0 to 15
7/18/2011
Page 70 of 205
Physical Scope
0 = (always select a cell if acceptable), 1 = 28 dB, 2 = 24 dB, ..., 15 = 28 dB
Setting
Related Commands
Signal Level Threshold for 3G Cell Reselection

This describes the signal level threshold for 3G cell reselection. Only when the signal level in the target 3G cell is higher than the serving cell by at least the
amount defined by FDD_Qmin, the target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.
ID
FDD_Qmin
Value Range
0 to 7
Physical Scope
0 = 20 dB, 1 = 6dB, 2 = 18 dB, 3 = 8 dB, 4 = 16 dB, 5 = 10 dB, 6 = 14 dB, 7 = 12 dB
Setting
Related Commands
Neighboring Cell Management Parameters

This describes the neighboring cell management parameters.
Table 1 List of neighboring cell management parameters
Serial No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
NPrioFlag
Neighboring cell priority flag
FALSE
NCell
Set: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL

Modify: MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
2
NPRIO
Neighboring cell priority
Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELL

Modify: MOD INTERFREQNCELL
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
7/18/2011
Page 71 of 205
Neighboring Cell Priority Flag

This describes the neighboring cell priority flag.
Neighboring Cell Priority
This describes the neighboring cell priority.

Neighboring Cell Priority Flag

This describes the neighboring cell priority flag.
ID
NPrioFlag
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
False, true
Setting
The default value of is FALSE.
This parameter is unnecessary for a new network.
To swap the network that is configured with neighboring cell priority, use the neighboring cell priority of the existing network and set NPrioFlag to TRUE.
An improper neighboring cell priority may result in missed configuration of neighboring cells.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set and use MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set and MOD GSMNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
Parent topic: Neighboring Cell Management Parameters
Neighboring Cell Priority

This describes the neighboring cell priority.
ID
NPrio
Value Range
0 to 30 (for intra-frequency neighboring cells)
0 to 63 (for inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighboring cells)
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The lower NPrio is, the higher the neighboring cell priority is.
7/18/2011
Page 72 of 205
An improper neighbor priority may result in missed configuration of neighboring cells.

Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
Use ADD INTERFREQNCELL to set and use MOD INTERFREQNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
Use ADD GSMNCELL to set and MOD GSMNCELL to modify NPrioFlag.
Parent topic: Neighboring Cell Management Parameters
Admission Control Parameters

This describes the admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of admission control parameters
Serial ID
No.
Meaning
MML Command
Level
Initial uplink and

downlink access rates of
BE services
64, namely 64 Kbit/s
Set or modify: SET FRC
RNC
ULBETraffInitBitRate
DLBETraffInitBitRate
IU_Qos_Neg_Switch
Query: LST FRC
Intelligent admission
algorithm switch
RAB_Downsizing_Switch
QueueAlgoSwitch
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH: 0
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH:
1
QUEUEALGOSWITCH: OFF
PREEMPTALGOSWITC: OFF
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
RNC
Set or modify: SET

CORRMALGOSWITCH
Query: LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH
PeemptAlgoSwitch
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and
PREEMPTALGOSWITC
Set or modify: SET
QUEUEPREEMPT
Query: LST QUEUEPREEMPT
3
UlTotalEqUserNum
Total number of uplink

equivalent subscribers
80
DlTotalEqUserNum
Total number of downlink

equivalent subscribers
80
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
AMR voice uplink

75, namely 75%
threshold of conversational
services
UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR
Non-AMR voice uplink

75, namely 75%
services
DlConvAMRThd
AMR voice downlink

80, namely 80%
services
DlConvNonAMRThd
Non-AMR voice downlink 80, namely 80%

services
UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Uplink admission
threshold of other services
60, namely 60%
10
DlOtherThd
Downlink admission
threshold of other services
75, namely 75%
11
UlNonCtrlThdForHo
Uplink threshold of
handovers, used for the
uplink admission of
handover UEs
80, namely 80%
12
DlHOThd
Downlink threshold of
85, namely 85%
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
7/18/2011
Page 73 of 205
handovers, used for the

downlink admission of
handover UEs
13
UlCellTotalThd
Total uplink power

threshold of the cell
83, namely 83%
14
DLCELLTOTALTHD
Total downlink power

threshold of the cell
90, namely 90%
15
UlHoCeResvSf
Reserved SF of the uplink

credit resources for
handovers
SF16
16
DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Reserved SF of the
downlink credit resources
for handovers
SF32
17
ULCCHLOADFACTOR
Load factor (%) of uplink

common channels
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF
Reserved load coefficient
(%) of downlink common
channels
Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Services

This describes the uplink and downlink initial access rates when BE services are set up.
Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch
This describes the intelligent admission algorithm switch. The intelligent admission algorithm switch consists of four subordinate algorithm switches:
the maximum rate negotiation switch (IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH), the initial rate selecting switch (RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH), the queuing
algorithm (QUEUEALGOSWITCH), and the preemption algorithm (PREEMPTALGOSWITCH).
Uplink Total Equivalent User Number
This describes the uplink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
Downlink Total Equivalent User Number
This describes the downlink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service
The uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversation service users.
Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service
This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation service and used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in
the conversation service.
AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services
This describes the AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on which the downlink admission of AMR-voice subscribers of
conversational services is implemented.
Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services
This describes the non-AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on which the downlink admission of non-AMR-voice
subscribers of conversational services is implemented.
Uplink Threshold for Other Services
This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is used for uplink admission of other services.
Downlink Admission Threshold of Other Services
This describes the downlink admission threshold of other services, based on which the downlink admission of subscribers of non conversational
services is implemented.
Uplink Handover Admission Threshold
The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameter is only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do
not do the admission judgment in the uplink soft handover.
Downlink Handover Admission Threshold
This describes the downlink handover admission threshold, based on which the downlink admission of handover subscribers is implemented.
Uplink Total Power Threshold
The total uplink power threshold of the cell is used for admission of HSPA uplink power resource.
Downlink Total Power Threshold
This describes the total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP), which is used for the admission of HSPA downlink power resource.
Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for Handovers
This describes the reserved threshold for the uplink credit handover. The threshold is used for the admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.
Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and Channel Code Resource for Handovers
This describes the spreading factor (SF) threshold of the downlink code resources and CE resources reserved for the handover. This parameter is used
for the admission of downlink code resources and credit for new subscribers.
Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load
This describes the uplink common channel load factor and the downlink common channel load factor. ULCCHLOADFACTOR is used to reserve the
resource for the uplink common channel, and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF is used to reserve the resource for the downlink common channel.

Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Services

This describes the uplink and downlink initial access rates when BE services are set up.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 74 of 205
ULBeTraffInitBitrate
DLBeTraffInitBitrate
Value Range
ULBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1024, D1450, D2048)
DLBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048)
Physical Scope
ULBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 608, 1024, 1450, 2048) kbit/s
DLBeTraffInitBitrate: Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 1800, 2048) kbit/s
Setting
The default value is D64.
To save the system resources and promote the admission success rate, the UE needs not to access with the maximum expected rate but implement the initial
access with a comparatively low rate when the BE services are being set up. After the access, the rate can be increased when the traffic requires a higher
rate and the system resources meet the demand.
When the DCCC function is enabled, the values are the uplink and downlink initial access rates when the BE services are set up if the value is lower than the
maximum bit rate. If the initial access rates do not meet the demand of the current load, the actual initial access rate is obtained through negotiation on the
basis of the uplink and downlink initial access rates when the BE services are set up.
NOTE:
When the uplink and downlink load is in initial congestion state, or the Iub transmission resources is in congestion state, the current intelligent admission
algorithm uses the minimum rate (generally 8 kbit/s) in the set of optional rates for the BE service as the access rate instead of gradually decreasing the
initial access rate through negotiation. When either the uplink load or the downlink load is in congestion, the UE access is rejected without any process of
decreasing the rate.
If ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate are set to comparatively higher values, the access rate of the BE services needs a shorter time to
reach the maximum value, but the rate is more easily to be decreased through negotiation when the system is in congestion, so it is improper to set the
access rate to an excessively high value.
If ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate are set to comparatively lower values, the BE services can access with the rate more easily, but it
takes a long time for the rate to increase to the rate required by some services.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ULBeTraffInitBitrate and DLBeTraffInitBitrate.
Parent topic: Admission Control Parameters
Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch

This describes the intelligent admission algorithm switch. The intelligent admission algorithm switch consists of four subordinate algorithm switches: the
maximum rate negotiation switch (IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH), the initial rate selecting switch (RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH), the queuing algorithm
(QUEUEALGOSWITCH), and the preemption algorithm (PREEMPTALGOSWITCH).
ID
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
QUEUEALGOSWITCH
PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Value Range
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: Enum (0, 1)
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: ON, OFF
Physical Scope
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 0 means disabled, 1 means enabled.
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: ON means enabled, OFF means disabled.
7/18/2011
Page 75 of 205
Setting
The default value of IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH is 0, and the default value of RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH is 1.
The default values of QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC are OFF.
The descriptions of the sub algorithms are as follows:
Maximum rate negotiation: At the RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification, and RAB transition, the real-time services or non-real-time
services (BE) at the PS domain requires rate negotiation based on the UE supported capability to get the maximum expected rate of a proper service
QoS request. This negotiation result should be sent to the CN. For the BE service, it is the maximum rate that can be reached through adjustment by
its DCCC.
RAB downsizing: At the RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification, and RAB transition, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS
domain requires selection of a proper initial rate from the typical rates that are smaller than or equal to the maximum expected rate after negotiation
and bigger than or equal to the lowest guaranteed rate according to the cell load information before application for cell resources. The bandwidth is
configured on the basis of the selected initial rate.
Preemption: At the service setup, modification, hard handover, and transition-in, if service request supports preemption capability (configured in CN)
when an application for cell resources fails, the system implements preemption and releases the resources of lower-priority users that can be
preempted to have the service request be set up.
Queuing: At the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in, if service requests do not support preemption capability but supports
the queuing capability or the preemption switch is closed when an application for cell resources fails, a queuing process is implemented. When the
heartbeat timer of queuing is in the timeout state, the system attempts to allocate resources to the service request with the minimum metric in the
queue.

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH are set based on the actual demand and the supporting capacity of the core network.
Preemption may increase the admission success rate of subscribers with high priority, but the preemption also may make the preempted subscriber be
released. Queuing may increase the admission success rate of RAB, but the queuing also may increase the admission time delay of queuing subscribers.
Related Commands
Use SET CORRMALGOSWITCH to set or modify and LST CORRMALGOSWITCH to query IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH.
Use SET QUEUEPREEMPT to set or modify and LST QUEUEPREEMPT to query QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.
Uplink Total Equivalent User Number

This describes the uplink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user number corresponding to
the 100% uplink load.
ID
UlTotalEqUserNum
Value Range
0 to 200
Physical Scope
0 to 200, with the step of 1
Setting
When algorithm 2 is used, the actual admission equivalent user number is equal to the admission threshold multiplied by the equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% load. This parameter defines the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.
This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according to the actual network condition.
If UlTotalEqUserNum is excessively high, the system load after admission probably becomes excessively high, which affects the system stability and
results in system congestion.
If UlTotalEqUserNum is excessively low, the subscribers are more likely to be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify UlTotalEqUserNum.
7/18/2011
Page 76 of 205
Downlink Total Equivalent User Number

This describes the downlink total equivalent user number. When algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user number corresponding
to the 100% downlink load.
ID
DlTotalEqUserNum
Value Range
0 to 200
Physical Scope
0 to 200, with the step of 1
Setting
When the algorithm 2 is used, the actual admission equivalent user number is equal to the admission threshold multiplied by the equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% load. This parameter defines the equivalent user number corresponding to the 100% load.
This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according to the actual network condition.
If DlTotalEqUserNum is excessively high, the system load after admission probably becomes excessively high, which affects the system stability and
results in system congestion.
If DlTotalEqUserNum is excessively low, the subscribers are more likely to be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlTotalEqUserNum.
AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service

The uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversation service users.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForAMR
Value Range
0 to 100
0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 75, that is 75%.
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requesting for admission, the uplink admission control algorithm
predicts the load factor of the system after the new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channel uplink load
factor as the predicted value of the new load factor, and then compares the predicted value of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted
load factor value is not bigger than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The uplink load thresholds include this parameter and uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold for other services and uplink
handover admission threshold. According to the relations among these four parameters, the proportions of the conversation service and other services in the
cell can be limited. These parameters can be also used to ensure the priorities of handover users and the conversation service access.
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too high, which affects the system stability and results in system congestion; if it is
too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.
This parameter, uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold for other services and uplink handover admission threshold should
7/18/2011
Page 77 of 205
be considered together with the network planning results.
If this parameter is too high, the target coverage in the network planning is influenced.
If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify it through MOD CELLCAC.
Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service

This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation service and used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the
conversation service.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR
Value Range
0 to 100
0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of new call according to the load factor of current system and
service feature of admission request call. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public channel as the new load
factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value with the load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than
the load factor threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is refused.
Uplink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation service, Uplink thresholds of other services and Uplink
handover admission threshold. You can restrict the proportion of conversation to other services in cell based on relations of the four parameters or use them
to ensure the priority of handover user and conversation service access.
If this parameter is set too high, the system load after admission may be overly heavy to affect the system stability, resulting in system congestion. If this
parameter is too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be left idle.
This parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation service, Uplink thresholds of other services and Uplink handover admission threshold should
be considered together with the planning result of network optimization to avoid over-big set target coverage affecting network optimization, or too-small
coverage that can not reach the target capacity.
Relevant Commands
AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services

This describes the AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on which the downlink admission of AMR-voice subscribers of
ID
DlConvAMRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%, with the step of 1%
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 78 of 205
The default value of DlConvAMRThd is 80, namely 80%.

According to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call, the downlink admission control algorithm predicts the system
load factor after admission of new calls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the downlink load factor of public channel as the new load
the load factor threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.
The downlink load thresholds are the AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational
services, and downlink threshold for other services. You can restrict the proportion of voice services to other services in the cell based on relations of the
four parameters or use them to guarantee the access priority of voice services.
The setting of DlConvAMRThd is related to the settings of cell radius and the maximum cell transmit power.
If DlConvAMRThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and
the system stability is affected when the cell coverage is very small.
If DlConvAMRThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled, and the target capacity of the network planning cannot be
reached.
The AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, downlink threshold for other
services, and downlink handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlConvAMRThd.
Non-AMR-Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversational Services

This describes the non-AMR-voice downlink thresholds of conversational services, based on which the downlink admission of non-AMR-voice subscribers of
ID
DlConvNonAMRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DlConvNonAMRThd is 80, namely 80%.
load factor after admission of new calls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the downlink load factor of public channel as the new load
the load factor threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.
The downlink load thresholds are the AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold conversational
services, and downlink threshold for other services. You can restrict the proportion of voice services to other services in the cell based on relations of the
four parameters or use them to guarantee the access priority of voice services.
The setting of DlConvNonAMRThd is related to the settings of cell radius and the maximum cell transmit power.
If DlConvNonAMRThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously,
and the system stability is affected when the cell coverage is very small.
If DlConvNonAMRThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled, and the target capacity of the network planning cannot
be reached.
The AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of conversational services, downlink threshold for other
services, and downlink handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlConvNonAMRThd.
7/18/2011
Page 79 of 205
Uplink Threshold for Other Services

This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is used for uplink admission of other services.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Value Range
0 to 100
0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
For the descriptions of this parameter, refer to Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service.
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission is probably too high, which affects the system stability and results in system congestion.
If it is too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be idled and wasted.
This parameter, with uplink threshold for conversation service and uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together with the network
planning results.
If it is too high, the object coverage in the network planning is influenced.

If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.
Relevant Commands
Downlink Admission Threshold of Other Services

This describes the downlink admission threshold of other services, based on which the downlink admission of subscribers of non conversational services is
implemented.
ID
DlOtherThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DlOtherThd is 75, namely 75%.
For the description of DlOtherThd, refer to Uplink Threshold for Other Services.
If DlOtherThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the
system stability is affected when the cell coverage is very small.
If DlOtherThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled, and the target capacity of the network planning cannot be
reached.
The downlink admission threshold for other services, AMR voice downlink threshold of conversational services, non-AMR-voice downlink threshold of
conversational services, and downlink handover admission threshold are set on the basis of the network planning result.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 80 of 205
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlOtherThd.
Uplink Handover Admission Threshold

The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameter is only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do
the admission judgment in the uplink soft handover.
Parameter ID
UlNonCtrlThdForHo
Value Range
0 to 100
0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requesting for admission, the uplink admission control algorithm
predicts the system load factor after the new service is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted value of the load factor and the uplink load factor of the
common channel as the predicted value of the new load factor, and compares the predicted load factor value with the load factor threshold. If the predicted
load factor value is not greater than the load factor threshold, the call is admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The uplink load thresholds include this parameter, uplink threshold for other services and uplink threshold for conversation services. According to the
relations among these three parameters, the proportions of the conversation service and other services in the cell can be limited. These parameters can also
be used to guarantee the priority of the handover users and the conversation service access. Uplink handover admission threshold must be smaller than
uplink OLC trigger threshold for smart load control.
This parameter is to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance; the value of this parameter must be greater than uplink
threshold for conversation services.
This parameter has effects only on inter-frequency handover; it has no influence on intra-frequency handover.
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too heavy, which influences the system stability and results in the system
congestion.
If it is too low, the probability that users are rejected is high, and some resources may be idle and wasted.
This parameter should be considered together with the uplink threshold for the conversation service and the uplink thresholds for other services. The
restriction is described as following:
ULOLCTRIGTHD ULCELLTOTALTHD ULNONCTRLTHDFORHO > ULNONCTRLTHDFORAMR, ULNONCTRLTHDFORNONAMR >

ULNONCTRLTHDFOROTHER ULLDRTRIGTHD ULLDRRELTHD;
DLOLCTRIGTHD DLCELLTOTALTHD DLHOTHD > DLCONVAMRTHD, DLCONVNONAMRTHD > DLOTHERTHD
DLLDRTRIGTHD DLLDRRELTHD;
Relevant Commands
Downlink Handover Admission Threshold

This describes the downlink handover admission threshold, based on which the downlink admission of handover subscribers is implemented.
ID
DLHOThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
7/18/2011
Page 81 of 205

Setting
The default value of DLHOThd is 85, namely 85%.
CAUTION:
The downlink handover admission threshold must be smaller than the downlink OLC trigger threshold for smart load control and not smaller than the
downlink threshold for conversational services.
load factor after admission of new calls. It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public channel as the new load factor
predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value with the load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the
load factor threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.
The downlink handover admission threshold aims to reserve handover resources and guarantee a good handover performance.
If DLHOThd is set to an excessively high value, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring cells are interfered seriously, and the
system stability is affected when the cell coverage is very small.
If DLHOThd is set to an excessively low value, the system resources may be idled.
The downlink handover admission threshold needs to be considered with the downlink threshold for conversational services and downlink threshold for
other services.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DLHOThd.
Uplink Total Power Threshold

The total uplink power threshold of the cell is used for admission of HSPA uplink power resource.
Parameter ID
ULCELLTOTALTHD
Value Range
0 to 100
0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 83, that is, 83%.
The setting of this parameter needs to consider the target load of uplink scheduling. Due to the scheduling mechanism of HSUPA, the total load of uplink
always fluctuates around the target load. Therefore, some margin is added to the target load of uplink scheduling to serve as the basis of setting this
parameter.
Relationship with other parameters: UlOlcTrigThd > UlCellTotalThd > UlNonCtrlThdForHo
If this parameter is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads to the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.
If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resource is idle and wasted.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify it through MOD CELLCAC.
Downlink Total Power Threshold

This describes the total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP), which is used for the admission of HSPA downlink power resource.
7/18/2011
Page 82 of 205
ID
DlCellTotalThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of DlCellTotalThd is 90, namely 90%.
If DlCellTotalThd is excessively high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads to the system congestion, and makes the system
unstable.
If DlCellTotalThd is excessively low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, and part of hardware resource is idle and wasted.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlCellTotalThd.
Reserved SF of the Uplink Credit Resource for Handovers

This describes the reserved threshold for the uplink credit handover. The threshold is used for the admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.
ID
UlHoCeResvSf
Value Range
SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is SF16.
SFOFF indicates that no resource is reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell uplink resources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is
admitted, this new service is rejected.
The reserved SF of the uplink credit resources for handovers aims to reserve resources for the UEs who perform the handover and to guarantee the
handover performance. The parameter should be higher than or equal to the uplink LDR credit reserved SF threshold.
The lower UlHoCeResvSf is, the less credit resource is reserved for UEs that perform the handover, and the higher the probability of handover subscriber
admission rejection is.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify UlHoCeResvSf.
Reserved SF of the Downlink Credit Resource and Channel Code Resource

for Handovers
This describes the spreading factor (SF) threshold of the downlink code resources and CE resources reserved for the handover. This parameter is used for
the admission of downlink code resources and credit for new subscribers.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 83 of 205
DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Value Range
Physical Scope
Setting
SFOFF indicates that no resource is reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell downlink resources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is
admitted, this new service is rejected.
To reserve resources for UEs who perform handovers and to guarantee a good handover performance, the SF of downlink code resources and CE resources
reserved for the handover should be higher than both the threshold of the SF reserved for the cell LDR and the threshold of the SF reserved for the cell
LDR.
The lower DlHoCeCodeResvSf is, the less credit resource is reserved for UEs that perform the handover, and the higher the probability of handover
subscriber admission rejection is.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlHoCeCodeResvSf.
Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load

This describes the uplink common channel load factor and the downlink common channel load factor. ULCCHLOADFACTOR is used to reserve the
resource for the uplink common channel, and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF is used to reserve the resource for the downlink common channel.
ID
ULCCHLOADFACTOR
DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The CAC is implemented only for dedicated channels, and also reserve some resource for common channels.
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call admission request, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the
load factor of the system after the new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channel uplink load factor as the
new predicted value of the load factor, and then compares the new predicted value of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load
factor value is not higher than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted. If the predicted load factor value is higher than the load factor threshold,
the call is rejected.
The higher ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF are, the more power resources are consumed, which may decrease the system
capacity. If ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF are excessively low, the power resources can be fully utilized, but the coverage may
become poor when the resources are insufficient.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify ULCCHLOADFACTOR and DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF.
7/18/2011
Page 84 of 205
Load Control Parameters

This describes the load control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.
Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters
This describes the overload congestion control (OLC) parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
Level
LDR period timer

length
10 s
Set or
modify:SET
LDCPERIOD
RNC
LdrPeriodTimerLen
Query:LST
LDCPERIOD
2
UlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd
Uplink or downlink UlLdrTrigThd: 55%

LDR trigger and
release threshold
DlLdrTrigThd: 70%
DlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd: 45%
DlLdrRelThd
DlLdrRelThd: 60%
UlLdrFirstAction
UlLdrSecondAction
Uplink or downlink ULLDRFirstAction: CODEADJ

LDR action
ULLDRFirstAction and DLLDRSecondAction:
INTERFREQLDHO
UlLdrThirdAction
UlLdrFourthAction
ULLDRSecondAction and DLLDRTHIRDAction:

BERATERED
UlLdrFifthAction
Others: NOACT
Set:ADD
CELLLDM
Cell
Query:LST
CELLLDM
Modify:MOD
CELLLDM
Set:ADD
CELLLDR
Cell
Query:LST
CELLLDR
Modify:MOD
CELLLDR
UlLdrSixthAction
UlLdrSeventhAction
UlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrFirstAction
DLLDRSecondAction
DLLDRThirdAction
DLLDRFourthAction
DLLDRFifthAction
DlLdrSixthAction
DlLdrSeventhAction
DlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrNinthAction
DlLdrTenthAction
4
ULLDRBERateReductionRabNum
ULLDRPSRTQosRenegRabNum
Number of users
processed by
uplink/downlink
LDR action
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM,
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM and
ULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM are set to
3 by default; others are set to 1 by default.
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM,
7/18/2011
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
Page 85 of 205
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM and
DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM are set to
3 by default ; others are set to 1 by default.
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
ULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
DLLDRBERateReductionRabNum
DLLDRPSRTQosRenegRabNum
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
5
ULINTERFREQHOCELLLOADSPACETHD UL or DL interfrequency cell load

handover load
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
space threshold
20
UlInterFreqHoBWThd
UL or DL interfrequency cell load

handover
maximum bound
width
20,000 bit/s
SF8
DlInterFreqHoBWThd
CellSfResThd
Cell SF reserved
threshold
DlCreditSfResThd
UL or DL credit SF SF8
reserved threshold
UlCreditSfResThd
9
LdrCodePriUseInd
LDR code priority

indicator
FALSE
10
CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd
Code congestion
select interfrequency
indication
FALSE
11
LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
Inter-Frequency
13%
handover code used
ratio space
threshold
12
GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Gold user load

control switch
OFF
13
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
MBMS power
control service
priority threshold
LDR Period Timer Length

This describes the LDR timer length. When the preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load Monitoring) module sends period of preliminary
congestion indication (namely LDR execution period) to LDR.
Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold
This describes the uplink and downlink load thresholds for the system to determine entering into or being released from the preliminary congestion
status. The uplink LDR trigger threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively. The downlink LDR trigger
threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively.
Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions
This describes the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions. The parameters are used to set the sequence of uplink or downlink LDR actions.
Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions
This describes the number of subscribers selected for uplink or downlink LDR actions.
Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency Handover
This describes the cell load space threshold for uplink or downlink inter-frequency handovers. A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell
of inter-frequency handover only when the current uplink load space of the cell is higher than the uplink inter-frequency handover cell load space
threshold, namely UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd . A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when
the current downlink load space of the cell is higher than the downlink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold, namely
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd. This parameter value is relative to the target cell LDR threshold.
Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell Load Handover
A subscriber can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the uplink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is
lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd or the uplink GBR of the HSUPA subbscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd. A subscriber can serve as the
target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the downlink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than
DlInterFreqHoBWThd or the downlink GBR of the HSDPA subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
7/18/2011
Page 86 of 205
Cell SF Reserved Threshold

This describes the cell SF reserved threshold. The code adjusting could be done only when the minimum available SF of a cell is higher than this
threshold.
Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold
This describes the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold. The uplink or downlink credit LDR could be triggered only when the SF factor
corresponding to the uplink or downlink reserved credit is higher than the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold.
LDR Code Priority Indicator
This describes the LDR code priority indicator, which indicates whether the priority of code is considered during the code reshuffling.
Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency Indication
This describes the code congestion select inter-frequency handover indication. If the parameter is set toTURE, subscribers can be selected for interfrequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion. If the parameter is set to FALSE, subscribers can not be selected for inter-frequency
load handover in the case of code resource congestion.
Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space Threshold
If the space threshold of code used ratio between the source cell and the destination cell is larger than this parameter, then start inter-frequency
handover.
Gold User Load Control Switch
This switch is used to decide whether the load control measures will be taken for gold user in the case of resource congestion or not.
MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold
This describes the MBMS power control service priority threshold. When the MBMS service priority is higher than the threshold, the preliminary
congestion status of a cell can be released through the decrease of power.
Parent topic: Load Control Parameters

LDR Period Timer Length

This describes the LDR timer length. When the preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load Monitoring) module sends period of preliminary
congestion indication (namely LDR execution period) to LDR.
ID
LdrPeriodTimerLen
Value Range
1 to 86400
Physical Scope
1 s to 86400 s, with the step of 1 s
Setting
The LDR period timer length is used by the LDM module. Upon detecting the preliminary congestion of uplink or downlink of the cell, the LDM module
sends preliminary congestion indications regularly with the interval of the LDR period. In addition, to reduce the message interactions between modules, the
uplink and downlink share the same period, that is, each preliminary congestion indication sent by the LDM module indicates whether the uplink,
downlink, or both the uplink and the downlink have preliminary congestion.
The LDR algorithm aims to slowly reduce the cell load and control the load below the admission threshold, each LDR action takes a period (for example the
inter-RAT load handover needs a delay of about 5 s if the compressed mode is needed), and there is a delay for the LDM module responds to the load
decreasing (the delay is about 3 s when the L3 filter coefficient is set to 6), so LdrPeriodTimerLen should be higher than 8.
The lower LdrPeriodTimerLen is, the more frequently the LDR action is executed, which decreases the load quickly. If LdrPeriodTimerLen is
excessively low, an LDR action may overlap the previous one before the previous result is displayed in LDM.
The higher LdrPeriodTimerLen is, the more likely this problem can be prevented. If LdrPeriodTimerLen is excessively high, the LDR action may be
executed rarely, failing to lower the load timely.
Related Commands
Use SET LDCPERIOD to set and LST LDCPERIOD to query LdrPeriodTimerLen.
Parent topic: Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters
Uplink or Downlink LDR Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold

This describes the uplink and downlink load thresholds for the system to determine entering into or being released from the preliminary congestion status.
The uplink LDR trigger threshold and release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively. The downlink LDR trigger threshold and
release threshold are UlLdrTrigThd and UlLdrRelThd respectively.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 87 of 205
UlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd
DlLdrTrigThd
DlLdrRelThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of ULLDRTrigThd is 55, namely 55%.

The default value of DLLDRTrigThd is 70, namely 70%.
The default value of ULLDRRelThd is 45, namely 45%.
The default value of DLLDRRelThd is 60, namely 60%.
CAUTION:
The uplink and downlink LDR trigger thresholds must be higher than the uplink and downlink LDR release thresholds.
When the uplink or downlink preliminary congestion is triggered, the system starts the uplink or downlink LDR action. The LDR control aims to reserve a
space for the admission and increase the admission success rate. Therefore, according to the current strategy, the LDR trigger threshold should be lower
and close to the index of the admission threshold in concern. For example, if the carrier is concerned about the access success rate of the voice service, the
LDR trigger threshold can be set to a value lower than and close to the admission threshold of the voice service but higher than the admission threshold of
the data service.
After the preliminary congestion state of the cell load is released, the system no longer implements the LDR action. Because the load fluctuates, the
difference between the LDR release threshold and trigger threshold should be higher than 10%. The ping-pong effect of the preliminary congestion state
may occur.
The lower the LDR trigger and release thresholds are, the easier the system enters the preliminary congestion status, the harder it is released from this
status, the easier the LDR action is triggered, and the more likely the users are affected. But, the admission success rate becomes higher since the resources
are preserved. The carrier shall make a trade-off between these factors.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDM to set, LST CELLLDM to query, and MOD CELLLDM to modify the uplink or downlink LDR trigger threshold and release
threshold.
Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions

This describes the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions. The parameters are used to set the sequence of uplink or downlink LDR actions.
ID
The first to the eighth actions of the uplink are set as follows:
UlLdrFirstAction
UlLdrSecondAction
UlLdrThirdAction
UlLdrFourthAction
UlLdrFifthAction
UlLdrSixthAction
UlLdrSeventhAction
UlLdrEighthAction
The first to the tenth actions of the downlink are set as follows:
7/18/2011
Page 88 of 205
DlLdrFirstAction
DLLDRSecondAction
DLLDRThirdAction
DLLDRFourthAction
DLLDRFifthAction
DlLdrSixthAction
DlLdrSeventhAction
DlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrNinthAction
DlLdrTenthAction
Value Range
Uplink Enum {NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO, CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED}
Downlink Enum {NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO, CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED}
Physical Scope
NOACT: No load reshuffling action is taken.
INTERFREQLDHO: The inter-frequency load handover is performed.
BERATERED (BE service rate decreasing): Channels are reconfigured for the BE service.
QOSRENEGO: The renegotiation on the QoS of the uncontrollable real-time service is performed.
CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO: The inter-RAT SHOULDBE load handover of the CS domain is performed.
CSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBELDHO: The inter-RAT SHOULDNOTBE load handover of the CS domain is performed.
CSINTERRATSHOULDBELDHO: The inter-frequency SHOULDBE load handover of the CS domain is performed.
PSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBELDHO: The inter-frequency SHOULDNOTBE load handover of the PS domain is performed.
AMRRATERED (AMR service rate decreasing): The setting of the TFC subset and the negotiation of the service rate can be performed for the AMR voice
service.
MBMSDECPOWER (MBMS power limiting): The MBMS service is configured with the maximum power.
CODEADJ (code tree reshuffling): The fragments of the downlink code tree are arranged.
Setting
The default value of DlLdrFirstAction is CODEADJDL.

The default values of ULLdrFirstAction and DLLdrSecondAction are INTERFREQLDHO.
The default values of ULLdrSecondAction and DLLdrThirdAction are BERATERED.
The default values of other parameters are NOACT.
The preceding parameters can be set to determine whether or not an action is taken in the LDR and the sequence of the LDR actions.
The LDR takes the actions in the preset sequence and judges whether each action is successful. If an action is unsuccessful, the LDR turns to the next action.
If an action is successful, or an action is set to NOACT, or all the preceding actions are taken, the LDR is finished, and the system waits for the next
triggering of the LDR.
Because each action is performed by an algorithm module, the LDR algorithm only selects users and delivers control messages, the execution result of each
action can be obtained after a delay, and the LDR algorithm cannot wait for a long time, so the LDR can only judge whether the actions succeed by whether
candidate users are found.
The inter-frequency load handover have no impact on the QoS of users and can balance the cell load, so the inter-frequency load handover usually serves as
the first action.
The BE service rate decreasing is effective only when the DCCC algorithm is enabled.
The uplink or downlink LDR actions are set on the basis of the actual needs and RNP (radio network planning) strategy.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 89 of 205
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify the settings of uplink or downlink LDR actions.
Number of Subscribers for Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions

This describes the number of subscribers selected for uplink or downlink LDR actions.
Parameter ID
ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (uplink LDR-BE service rate reduction RAB number)
ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (uplink LDR uncontrollable real-time service negotiation RAB number)
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number)
ULCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number)
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
ULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM(uplink LDR-AMR service reduction RAB number)
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ (downlink channel code maximum reshuffled user number)
DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-BE service reduction RAB number)
DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (downlink LDR uncontrollable real-time service negotiation RAB number)
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number)
DLCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM (downlink LDR-PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number)
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM(downlink LDR-PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-AMR service reduction RAB number)
Value Range
1 to 10
None
Parameter Setting
The following parameters are set to 1 by default:
ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
ULPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUENUM
DLPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTHOUENUM
The other parameters are set to 3 by default.
Uplink/Downlink LDR-BE service rate reduction user number: This parameter can be configured according to the actual user distribution. If the
proportion of high-rate users is large, you need to set a smaller value for this parameter. If the proportion of high-rate users is small, you need to set a
greater value. Because the preliminary congestion control algorithm is designed to slowly decrease cell load, you need to set a small value for this
parameter.
Uplink/Downlink uncontrollable real-time service negotiation user number: The target users of this parameter are the PS real-time service users. The
setting of this parameter is analogous to the setting of BE service reduction user number. Because the number of users performing QoS renegotiation
may be smaller than the value of this parameter, for example, the candidate users selected for downlink LDR do not meet the QoS renegotiation
conditions, you must leave some margin when setting this parameter to ensure the success of load reengineering.
Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: The target users of this parameter are the CS domain users.
Because the CS domain users are session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big value for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number: The target users of this parameter are the CS domain users.
Because the CS domain users are session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big value for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: The target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The
7/18/2011
Page 90 of 205
setting of this parameter is analogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.
Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number: The target users of this parameter are the PS domain users.
The setting of this parameter is analogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.
Downlink channel code maximum reshuffling user number: Code reshuffling has a great impact on user feelings. In addition, the reshuffled users
occupy two code resources during code reshuffling. Thus, you must set a small value for this parameter.
For each user, during a life cycle of preliminary congestion, a type of uplink/downlink LDR action can be selected only once. After a type of uplink/downlink
LDR action is selected by a user, the uplink/downlink LDR marks the user. If this type of action is triggered again, this user is not selected as the candidate
user. Note that an action is performed separately in the uplink and downlink directions. That is, the same action is performed one time in both the uplink
direction and the downlink action.
The greater the values of this set of parameters are, the more significant the load of the local cell is reduced. This, however, may affect user feeling or cause
traffic congestion in the target cell. The smaller the values of this set of parameters are, the smaller the load range are adjusted by the LDR. This, however,
more probably ensures users' QoS and balances traffic load.
Relevant Commands
Use the ADD CELLLDR command for configuration, the LST CELLLDR command for query, and the MOD CELLLDR command for modification.
Cell Load Space Threshold for Uplink or Downlink Inter-Frequency

Handover
This describes the cell load space threshold for uplink or downlink inter-frequency handovers. A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of
inter-frequency handover only when the current uplink load space of the cell is higher than the uplink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold,
namely UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd . A blind handover target cell can serve as the target cell of inter-frequency handover only when the current
downlink load space of the cell is higher than the downlink inter-frequency handover cell load space threshold, namely DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.
This parameter value is relative to the target cell LDR threshold.
ID
UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
The lower UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd are, the easier it is to find a qualified target cell for the blind
handover. Excessively small values of the parameters, however makes the target cell easily enter the congestion status.
The higher UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd are, the more difficult it is for the inter-frequency blind
handover occurs, and the easier it is to guarantee the stability of the target cell.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd and
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.
Upper Threshold of Bandwidth for Uplink or Downlink Inter-frequency Cell

Load Handover
A subscriber can serve as the target subscriber of an inter-frequency load handover only when the uplink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than
UlInterFreqHoBWThd or the uplink GBR of the HSUPA subbscriber is lower than UlInterFreqHoBWThd. A subscriber can serve as the target subscriber
of an inter-frequency load handover only when the downlink RB bandwidth of the R99 subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd or the downlink
GBR of the HSDPA subscriber is lower than DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
7/18/2011
Page 91 of 205
ID
UlInterFreqHoBWThd
DlInterFreqHoBWThd
Value Range
0 to 400000
Physical Scope
0 bit/s to 400000 bit/s
Setting
The default value is 200000, namely 200000 bit/s.
The higher UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd are, the higher the service rate of the user in handover is, and the more obviously the
cell load is decreased. But high values of UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd give rise to the fluctuation and congestion of the target
cell load.
The lower UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd are, the smaller amplitude of the load decreases as a result of the inter-frequency load
handover, and the easier it is to maintain the stability of the target cell load.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify UlInterFreqHoBWThd and DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
Cell SF Reserved Threshold

This describes the cell SF reserved threshold. The code adjusting could be done only when the minimum available SF of a cell is higher than this threshold.
ID
CellLdrSfResThd
Value Range
SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
This parameter indicates the condition how code resource trigger the load reshuffling algorithm. When the downlink residually least SF code is lower than
CellLdrSfResThd, the cell is in downlink code resource congestion state. At this time LDR action begins to work. The LDR control aims to reserve the code
resource to improve the admission success rate of newly accessing subscribers.
The restriction of setting this parameter is as following:
DlHoCeCodeResvSf CellLdrSfResThd
The lower the code resource LDR trigger threshold is, the easier the downlink code resource enters the initial congestion status, the easier the LDR action is
triggered, and the easier the subscriber perception is affected. But a lower code resource LDR trigger threshold causes a higher admission success rate
because the resource is reserved. The parameter should be set based on the operator's requirement.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify CellLdrSfResThd.
Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshold
7/18/2011
Page 92 of 205
This describes the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold. The uplink or downlink credit LDR could be triggered only when the SF factor
corresponding to the uplink or downlink reserved credit is higher than the uplink or downlink credit SF reserved threshold.
ID
UlLdrCreditSfResThd
DlLdrCreditSfResThd
Value Range
SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
This parameter indicates the condition how CE resource trigger the load reshuffling algorithm. When the downlink residually CE resource corresponding
SF code is higer than DlLdrCreditSfResThd, the cell is in downlink code resource congestion state. At this time LDR action begins to work. The LDR
control aims to reserve the code resource to improve the admission success rate of newly accessing subscribers.
The restriction of setting this parameter is as following:
UlHoCeResvSf UlLdrCreditSfResThd
DlHoCeCodeResvSf DlLdrCreditSfResThd
If the SF corresponding to the current UL/DL remaining credit resource is higher than the threshold defined by this parameter, the UL/DL credit LDR
could be performed and the related handling actions are taken.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify UlLdrCreditSfResThd and DlLdrCreditSfResThd.
LDR Code Priority Indicator

This describes the LDR code priority indicator, which indicates whether the priority of code is considered during the code reshuffling.
ID
LdrCodePriUseInd
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
FALSE means not considering the code priority during the code reshuffling. TRUE means considering the code priority during the code reshuffling.
If LdrCodePriUseInd is TRUE, the codes with high priority are reserved during the code reshuffling. It is good for the code resource dynamic sharing,
which is a function used for the HSDPA service.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify LdrCodePriUseInd.
7/18/2011
Page 93 of 205
Code Congestion Select Inter-Frequency Indication

This describes the code congestion select inter-frequency handover indication. If the parameter is set toTURE, subscribers can be selected for interfrequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion. If the parameter is set to FALSE, subscribers can not be selected for inter-frequency load
handover in the case of code resource congestion.
Parameter ID
CodeCongSelInterFreqHoInd
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE
None.
Parameter Setting
The setting of this parameter needs to refer to usage of network resources. In the case of multi-frequency coverage, if code resource is the bottleneck (such
as for the indoors), it is recommended that the parameter be set as True.
When the setting is True, subscribers can be selected for inter-frequency load handover in the case of code resource congestion to eliminate code congestion
more easily and to use multi-frequency resource effectively. However, inter-frequency blind handover will also introduce the risk of call drops.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify it through MOD CELLLDR.
Inter-Frequency Handover Code used Ratio Space Threshold

If the space threshold of code used ratio between the source cell and the destination cell is larger than this parameter, then start inter-frequency handover.
Parameter ID
LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
Value Range
0 to 100
0 to 100%, step is 1%.
Parameter Setting
The setting of this parameter needs to consider the bandwidth of inter-frequency handover subscribers. It should be avoided as much as possible to cause
the destination cell congested by subscribershandover.
The smaller the setting, the more likely to find blind handover target cells that meet LDR conditions is. However, an extremely small setting is likely to
cause the target cell congested. The greater the setting, the less likely to incur inter-frequency blind handover is, but the more likely to ensure the reliability
of the target cell is.
Relevant Commands
Gold User Load Control Switch
7/18/2011
Page 94 of 205
This switch is used to decide whether the load control measures will be taken for gold user in the case of resource congestion or not.
Parameter ID
GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
None.
Parameter Setting
The setting is based on the policy of operators towards VIP subscribers. If service quality is to be ensured in resource congestion, this parameter is not
enabled.
If this parameter is enabled, load control measures such as down-speeding and handover will be taken for VIP subscribers in the case of resource congestion
in the cell, thus affecting service quality of VIP subscribers. Otherwise, no measures will be taken for VIP subscribers in the case of resource congestion.
Relevant Commands
MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold

This describes the MBMS power control service priority threshold. When the MBMS service priority is higher than the threshold, the preliminary
congestion status of a cell can be released through the decrease of power.
ID
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
1 to 15
Setting
When the priority of the RAB of MBMS services exceeds this threshold, reconfigure the MBMS power to the minimum power.
The lower MbmsDecPowerRabThd is, the bigger the scope for selecting the MBMS services is, the more cell load is decreased, the more effect there is
on the MBMS service. At the same time, the cell overload is significantly decreased while the impact on the MBMS services becomes bigger.
The higher MbmsDecPowerRabThd is, the smaller the scope for selecting the MBMS services is, the less cell load is decreased, the more effect there is
on the MBMS services, and the quality of services with high priority, however, can be guaranteed.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify MbmsDecPowerRabThd.
Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters

This describes the overload congestion control (OLC) parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of overload congestion control parameters
7/18/2011
Page 95 of 205
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
OlcPeriodTimerLen
OLC period timer length
3000, namely 3 s
Set or modify: SET

LDCPERIOD
RNC
Query: LST
LDCPERIOD
2
UlOlcTrigThd
Uplink or downlink OLC trigger

threshold and release threshold
UlOlcTrigThd: 95%
DlOlcTrigThd: 95%
DlOlcTrigThd
UlOlcRelThd
UlOlcRelThd: 80%
DlOlcRelThd: 80%
UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
Uplink or downlink OLC fast TF

restriction times
DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
4
UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum Number of RABs selected for the uplink

or downlink OLC fast TF restriction
DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
RateRstrctTimerLen
Cell
Query: LST
CELLLDM
Modify: MOD
CELLLDM
DlOlcRelThd
3
Set: ADD CELLLDM
Set: ADD CELLOLC

Query: LST
CELLOLC
Modify: MOD
CELLOLC
OLC fast TF restrict data rate restriction RateRstrctTimerLen: 3000 (3 s),

timer length and recovery timer length
RateRecoverTimerLen: 5000 (5 s)
RateRecoverTimerLen
6
RateRstrctCoef
Data rate restriction coefficient for OLC

fast TF restriction
68, namely 68%
UlOlcTraffRelRabNum
Number of RABs released for the uplink

or downlink traffic
DlOlcTraffRelRabNum
OLC Period Timer Length

This describes the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and then restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the
period of the OLC action. The uplink OLC and downlink OLC share the same timer.
Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold
This describes the thresholds for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink enters overload status and the threshold for the system to
determine that the uplink or downlink overload is released.
Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times
This describes the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times, which indicate the number of times for which the uplink or downlink OLC fast
TF restriction is executed. The number of uplink OLC fast TF restriction times is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, and the number of downlink OLC fast TF
restriction times is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.
Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction
This describes the number of RABs selected for an uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction. The number of RABs selected for an uplink OLC fast
TF restriction is UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum, and the number of RABs selected for a downlink OLC fast TF restriction is DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum.
OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover Timer Length
This describes the OLC fast TF data rate restriction timer length and recover timer length. RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for which the
MAC applies TF restriction to BE subscribers in a downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC
applies TF recovery to BE subscribers when the downlink overload is released.
OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Coefficient
This describes the data rate restriction coefficient for OLC fast TF restriction. The data rate restriction coefficient indicates the degree of the rate
restriction.
Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic Release
This describes the number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release. The number of RABs released by an uplink traffic
release is UlOlcTraffRelRabNum, and the number of RABs released by a downlink traffic release is DlOlcTraffRelRabNum.
Parent topic: Load Control Parameters

OLC Period Timer Length

This describes the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and then restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the
period of the OLC action. The uplink OLC and downlink OLC share the same timer.
ID
OlcPeriodTimerLen
Value Range
100 to 86400000
Physical Scope
100 ms to 86400 s, with the step of 1 ms
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 96 of 205
The default value of OlcPeriodTimerLen is 3000, namely 3 s.

In the current overload control algorithm, all the uplink/downlink OLC actions (TF restriction and user release) are executed in the period of the OLC
timer.
When the uplink or downlink has overload, the system implements overload control and checks whether the OLC period timer is started in the current cell.
If the OLC period timer is not started, the system starts the timer. If the OLC period timer is started, the system shares the timer.
When the OLC timer times out, the system checks the overload state of the cell. If the uplink or downlink has overload, the system implement overload
control of the uplink or downlink. If both the uplink and the downlink have overload, the system implements the overload control based on a comprehensive
decision. When implementing the overload control, the system resets the OLC timer. The system implements the overload control until both the uplink and
the downlink has no overload.
NOTE:
When setting OlcPeriodTimerLen, consider the hysteresis for which the load monitoring responds to the load change. For example, when the layer 3 filter
coefficient is 6, the hysteresis for which the load measurement responds to the step-function signals is about 2.8 s, namely that the system can trace the load
control effect about 3 s later after each load control. In this case, the OLC period timer length cannot be smaller than 3 s.
OlcPeriodTimerLen along with ULOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, DLOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, ULOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes, DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes,
ULOLCTraffRelUserNum, and DLOLCTraffRelUserNum determine the time it takes to release the uplink/downlink overload.
If the OLC period is excessively long, the system may respond very slowly to overload.
If the OLC period is excessively short, unnecessary adjustment may occur before the previous OLC action has taken effect, and therefore the system
performance is affected.
Related Commands
Use SET LDCPERIOD to set and LST LDCPERIOD to query OlcPeriodTimerLen.
Parent topic: Cell Overload Congestion Control Parameters
Uplink or Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold

This describes the thresholds for the system to determine that the uplink or downlink enters overload status and the threshold for the system to determine
that the uplink or downlink overload is released.
ID
UlOlcTrigThd
DlOlcTrigThd
UlOlcRelThd
DlOlcRelThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The default values of UlOlcTrigThd and DlOlcTrigThd are 95 (95%). The default values of UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd are 80 (80%).
CAUTION:
The OLC trigger threshold must be not higher than the OLC release threshold.
The system judges whether the uplink or downlink is in overload status on the basis of the uplink or downlink OLC trigger threshold. If the cell load is
higher than the threshold for consecutive pre-determined times, the system is already in overload status for a long time. In this case, the system performs
operations of the OLC algorith, including fast TF restriction or even user release, if the cell OLC switch is enabled.
The uplink handover admission threshold guarantees the stability of the system, so UlOlcTrigThd must be higher than UlHOThd, and DlOlcTrigThd must
be higher than DlHOThd.
UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd indicates that the uplink and downlink have recovered to the normal state (the overload is released). When the cell load is
lower than the UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd within a hysteresis, the system has already entered the normal state and stops the uplink and downlink OLC.
The uplink or downlink OLC release threshold must guarantee the system stability. To ensure that the overload can be released after the system implements
the overload algorithm to limit the rate of BE services, the value of the uplink or downlink OLC release threshold should not be much lower than or close to
7/18/2011
Page 97 of 205
the OLC trigger threshold, or the system state may have a ping-pong effect. The recommended difference between the OLC release threshold and the OLC
trigger threshold is higher than 10%.
The lower the OLC trigger threshold is, the easier the system is in the overload status. Since OLC ultimately uses extreme method like releasing users
to lower the load, an excessively low value of the OLC trigger threshold is very detrimental to the system performance.
The lower the OLC release threshold is, the harder the system releases the overload.
Since the consequence of overload is not as severe as expected, it is desirable to set the two parameters a bit higher given that the difference between OLC
trigger threshold and OLC release threshold is fixed.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDM to set, LST CELLLDM to query, and MOD CELLLDM to modify the uplink or downlink OLC trigger threshold and release
threshold.
Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times

This describes the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times, which indicate the number of times for which the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF
restriction is executed. The number of uplink OLC fast TF restriction times is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, and the number of downlink OLC fast TF restriction
times is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.
ID
UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 100 times
Setting
After the uplink or downlink overload is triggered, the RNC immediately executes OLC by first executing uplink/downlink fast TF restriction. The internal
counter is incremented by 1 with each execution. If the number of overloads does not exceed the OLC action threshold, the system lowers the BE service
rate by lowering TF to relieve the overload. If the number of overloads exceeds the OLC action threshold, the previous operation has no obvious effect on
alleviating the overload and the system has to release users to solve the overload problem.
The lower the parameters are, the more likely the users are released, resulting in negative effect on the system performance. If the parameters are
excessively high, the overload status is released slowly.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times.
Number of RABs Selected for the Uplink or Downlink OLC Fast TF

Restriction
This describes the number of RABs selected for an uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction. The number of RABs selected for an uplink OLC fast TF
restriction is UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum, and the number of RABs selected for a downlink OLC fast TF restriction is DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum.
ID
UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 98 of 205
1 to 10
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The OLC selects RABs on the basis of comprehensive priorities. It considers the service priority, the value of ARP, and the bearer priority indication, and
selects the RABs with lower priorities. In the actual system, UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum can be set on the basis of the actual
circumstances.
If the high-rate subscribers occupy a high proportion, set UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum to comparatively low values.
If the high-rate subscribers occupy a low proportion, set UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum and DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum to comparatively high values.

The higher the parameters are, the more users are involved in fast TF restriction under the same conditions, the quicker the cell load decreases, and the
more user QoS is affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify the number of RABs selected for the uplink or downlink OLC fast
TF restriction.
OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Timer Length and Recover Timer
Length
This describes the OLC fast TF data rate restriction timer length and recover timer length. RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC
applies TF restriction to BE subscribers in a downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for which the MAC applies TF
recovery to BE subscribers when the downlink overload is released.
ID
RateRstrctTimerLen
RateRecoverTimerLen
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 ms to 65535 ms
Setting
The default value of RateRstrctTimerLen is 3000, namely 3 s.

The default value of RateRecoverTimerLen is 5000, namely 5 s.
Once the MAC layer receives an instruction to perform the fast TF restriction on a subscriber, it periodically uses the rate restriction coefficient to restrict
the maximum available TF of the subscriber until it receives an overload release instruction. Therefore, every period specified by RateRstrctTimerLen,
apart from the new OLC-selected users who are TF restricted, the previously selected users are also fast-TF restricted in an effort to release the overload
more quickly. In order to timely adjust the BE service rate according to the load, the value of RateRstrctTimerLen shall be slightly higher than the system
load response time after rate adjustment and the period of overload detection.
To avoid the fast TF restriction on the same user and guarantee the QoS of a single user, set RateRstrctTimerLen to the maximum value (65535).
Upon receiving the overload release instruction, the MAC layer periodically recovers the maximum available TF of the previously restricted BE users
according to the period specified by RateRecoverTimerLen, and raises the maximum available TF to the superior level each time.
CAUTION:
RateRstrctTimerLen and RateRecoverTimerLen are effective only to the downlink. The uplink fast TF restriction is performed by the UE. For the uplink
fast TF restriction, the RNC only delivers a new TFCS and randomly selects a comparatively bigger time length in the signaling value scope. As soon as the
time length selected by the RNC comes to an end, the UE automatically releases the TF restriction.
The higher RateRstrctTimerLen is, the more slowly the BE service rate decreases. The lower RateRstrctTimerLen is, the harder it is to receive the overload
7/18/2011
Page 99 of 205
release instruction.
The higher RateRecoverTimerLen is, the more slowly the BE service rate recovers, while the lower probability that the overload is triggered again in a short
period. The lower RateRecoverTimerLen is, the more quickly the BE service rate is recovered, but more overloads occur.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify RateRstrctTimerLen and RateRecoverTimerLen.
OLC Fast TF Data Rate Restriction Coefficient

This describes the data rate restriction coefficient for OLC fast TF restriction. The data rate restriction coefficient indicates the degree of the rate
restriction.
ID
RateRstrctCoef
Value Range
1 to 99
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of RateRstrctCoef is 68, namely 68%.
When configuring RateRstrctCoef, comply with the following principles:
Guaranteee the rate control effect on the high speed services, such as the 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, and 144 kbit/s services.
When there are more than two transport blocks, the restriction on the biggest transport block must be effective, that is, the rate of the transport block must
decrease by at lest one level.
For the 384 kbit/s service, TTI = 10 MS, and the TB set is {0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 12}. Consuming that the rate restriction coefficient is x, the restriction rules are as
follows:
8<12x<12
4<12x2<8
2<12x3<4
Through calculation on the basis of the preceding rules, x can be set to 0.68.
The lower the parameter is, the more severe the rate is restricted. An excessive low RateRstrctCoef, however, may affect the BE transmission delay. A high
RateRstrctCoef means loose restriction, which may be ineffective in alleviating the overload.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify RateRstrctCoef.
Number of RABs Released by the Uplink or Downlink Traffic Release

This describes the number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release. The number of RABs released by an uplink traffic release is
UlOlcTraffRelRabNum, and the number of RABs released by a downlink traffic release is DlOlcTraffRelRabNum.
ID
UlOlcTraffRelRabNum
DlOlcTraffRelRabNum
Value Range
0 to 10
7/18/2011
Page 100 of 205
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The number of RABs that are released by an uplink or downlink traffic release should be considered together with the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF
restriction times and the number of RABs selected for the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction.
When the uplink or downlink OLC fast TF restriction times exceed the threshold set by UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes or DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes, the OLC starts
releasing users. For the users of a single service, the releasing of RABs means the complete releasing of the users. The releasing of RABs causes call drops, so
UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes or DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes should be set to a low value.
Higher values of these parameters get the cell load to decrease more obviously, but the QoS will be affected.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLOLC to set, LST CELLOLC to query, and MOD CELLOLC to modify the number of RABs released by an uplink or downlink traffic
release.
PS Service Rate Control Parameters

This describes the PS service rate control parameters: the service-related thresholds, DCCC parameters, link stability parameters, state transfer
parameters, PS active parameters, and so on.
BE Service Related Threshold Parameters

The common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.
Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Traffic
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on traffic.
Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Throughput
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on throughput.
Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link Quality
This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on link quality.
State Transition Parameters
This describes the state transition parameters.
PS Inactive
The common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.

BE Service Related Threshold Parameters

The common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of BE service related threshold parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
BeBitRateThd
BE service handover rate threshold
D384, that is, 384 kbit/s
Set or Modify:SET HOCOMM
RNC
R99GoldIAVUlGBR
Uplink and downlink BE service guarantee bit rate
D64, namely 64 kbit/s
Query:LST HOCOMM
R99GoldIAVDlGBR
Set or modify: SET USERGBR

Query: LST USERGBR
R99SilverIAVUlGBR
R99SilverIAVDlGBR
R99CopperIAVUlGBR
R99CopperIAVDlGBR
HSPAGoldIAVUlGBR
HSPAGoldIAVDlGBR
HSPASilverIAVUlGBR
7/18/2011
Page 101 of 205
HSPASilverIAVDlGBR
HSPACopperIAVUlGBR
HSPACopperIAVDlGBR
R99GoldBGDUlGBR
R99GoldBGDDlGBR
R99SilverBGDUlGBR
R99SilverBGDDlGBR
R99CopperBGDUlGBR
R99CopperBGDDlGBR
HSPAGoldBGDUlGBR
HSPAGoldBGDDlGBR
HSPASilverBGDUlGBR
HSPASilverBGDDlGBR
HSPACopperBGDUlGBR
HSPACopperBGDDlGBR
3
UlStrTransModeOnHsupa
Streaming service HSUPA transmission mode
Non-Scheduled
Set or modify:SET FRC

Query:LST FRC
BE Service Handover Rate Threshold

This describes the Best Effort (BE) service handover rate threshold. The BE service handover rate threshold is used to determine whether to perform
soft handovers for the BE service on the DCH. When the maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service is lower than or equal to the BE
service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform a soft handover to guarantee the service quality of the subscriber. When the
maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service exceeds the BE service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform
an intra-frequency hard handover to reduce the impact upon the system capacity.
Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate
This describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH and H share a set of parameters.
Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode
This describes the HSUPA transmission mode switch for streaming services. The parameter is used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode of
the streaming service and is valid only when the mapping from the streaming service to E-DCH is available.
Parent topic: PS Service Rate Control Parameters

BE Service Handover Rate Threshold

This describes the Best Effort (BE) service handover rate threshold. The BE service handover rate threshold is used to determine whether to perform soft
handovers for the BE service on the DCH. When the maximum rate of the transmission channel of the BE service is lower than or equal to the BE service
handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform a soft handover to guarantee the service quality of the subscriber. When the maximum rate
of the transmission channel of the BE service exceeds the BE service handover rate threshold, the system has the subscriber perform an intra-frequency
hard handover to reduce the impact upon the system capacity.
ID
BeBitRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
The default value is D384, namely 384 kbit/s.
The higher BeBitRateThd is, the more resources are consumed, but the better the QoS becomes.
7/18/2011
Page 102 of 205
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query BeBitRateThd.
Parent topic: BE Service Related Threshold Parameters
Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate

This describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH and H share a set of parameters.
Parameter ID
R99GoldIAVUlGBR
R99GoldIAVDlGBR
R99SilverIAVUlGBR
R99SilverIAVDlGBR
R99CopperIAVUlGBR
R99CopperIAVDlGBR
HSPAGoldIAVUlGBR
HSPAGoldIAVDlGBR
HSPASilverIAVUlGBR
HSPASilverIAVDlGBR
HSPACopperIAVUlGBR
HSPACopperIAVDlGBR
R99GoldBGDUlGBR
R99GoldBGDDlGBR
R99SilverBGDUlGBR
R99SilverBGDDlGBR
R99CopperBGDUlGBR
R99CopperBGDDlGBR
HSPAGoldBGDUlGBR
HSPAGoldBGDDlGBR
HSPASilverBGDUlGBR
HSPASilverBGDDlGBR
HSPACopperBGDUlGBR
HSPACopperBGDDlGBR
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, and D384
8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, and 384 (unit: kbit/s)
Parameter Setting
The default value is D64, which stands for 64 kbit/s.
You can assign different GBRs to the users with different priorities to show service differentiation. The QoS of the users with higher priorities is better. The
user access, however, becomes more difficult.
7/18/2011
Page 103 of 205
Relevant Commands
Use the SET USERGBR command for configuration and use the LST USERGBR command for query.
Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode

This describes the HSUPA transmission mode switch for streaming services. The parameter is used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode of the
streaming service and is valid only when the mapping from the streaming service to E-DCH is available.
ID
UlStrTransModeOnHsupa
Value Range
Scheduled, Non-Scheduled
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default setting is Non-Scheduled.
None.
Related Commands
For the RNC level, use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query UlStrTransModeOnHsupa.
Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Traffic

This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on traffic.
Table 1 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
Event4aThd
Traffic upper threshold
D1024, that is, 1024 bytes
Set: ADD TYPRABDCCCMC
RNC
Event4bThd
Traffic lower threshold
D128, that is, 128 bytes
TimetoTrigger4A
Time to trigger event 4A
D240, that is, 240 ms
TimetoTrigger4B
Time to Trigger event 4B
D2560, that is, 2.56 s
UlDcccRateThd
Uplink DCCC rate thresholds
D64 (64 kbit/s)
DlDcccRateThd
Downlink DCCC rate thresholds
D64 (64 kbit/s)
UlMidRateThd
Uplink middle rate thresholds
D128 (128 kbit/s)
DlMidRateThd
Downlink middle rate thresholds
D128 (128 kbit/s)
UlMidRateCalc
Uplink middle rate calculate method
HAND_APPOINT
10
DlMidRateCalc
Downlink middle rate calculate method
HAND_APPOINT
11
UlRateUpAdjLevel
Uplink rate increase adjust level
3_Rates
12
DlRateUpAdjLevel
Downlink increase adjust level
3_Rates
13
UlRateDnAdjLevel
Uplink rate decrease adjust level
3_Rates
14
DlRateDnAdjLevel
Downlink rate decrease adjust level
3_Rates
15
LittleRateThd
Low activity bitrate threshold
D64, that is, 64 kbit/s
Query: LST TYPRAB

Modify: MOD TYPRABDCCCMC
Set or modify: SET DCCC
RNC
Query: LST DCCC
Traffic Upper Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of the traffic, which is used to check whether there is any data to be transmitted.
Traffic Lower Threshold
This describes the lower threshold of the traffic. If the RLC buffer payload is lower than the lower threshold of the traffic for a certain period, the
system reports the 4B event. The 4B event is implemented to detect for the decreasing of traffic. When the traffic transport is about to be finished, the
traffic in the buffer soon decreases to zero.
7/18/2011
Page 104 of 205
Time to Trigger Event 4A

This describes the time to trigger the 4A event. When the traffic exceeds the upper threshold for a certain period, the system reports the 4A event.
Time to Trigger Event 4B
This describes the time to trigger the 4B event. When the traffic is lower than the lower threshold for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event.
Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels
These parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.
Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate Threshold
When the uplink or downlink maximum rate applied for the BE service is not higher than the uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold, the system
does not reconfigure channels according to the uplink or downlink traffic.
Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate Method
This describes the uplink or downlink middle rate calculate method which can be set to HAND_APPOINT or AUTO_CALC.
Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle Rate
This describes the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate. The uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is configured when 3 rate adjusting in DCCC is
used and the middle rate computing method is HAND_APPOINT. If the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is not configured, the middle rate
equals half of the maximum rate.
Low Activity Rate Threshold
This describes the low activity rate threshold. When the PS BE service rate has reduced to the rate threshold of DCCC, but the UE cannot transfer to
the CELL_FACH state for some reasons (for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is off; UE has CS service), the PS BE service rate is
reduced to the low activity rate threshold if the PS BE service satisfies the requirement of D2F.

Traffic Upper Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of the traffic, which is used to check whether there is any data to be transmitted.
ID
Event4aThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k, D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k,
D512k, D768k)
Physical Scope
Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k, 128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes
Setting
The default value is D1024, namely 1024 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink and uplink.
Event 4A: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) exceeds an absolute threshold. When this event occurs, data
transmission is accelerated through the increase of channel transmission bandwidth.
The setting of the traffic upper threshold is used to check whether there are data to be transmitted. Therefore, to quickly satisfy the demand of data
transmission, Event4AThd can be configured to a comparatively low value. If Event4AThd is excessively low, the channel reconfiguration may be triggered
to increase bandwidth even when users have no enough data to be transmitted.
Related Commands
For service-oriented parameters:
Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LST TYPRAB to query Event4AThd.
Parent topic: Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Traffic
Traffic Lower Threshold

This describes the lower threshold of the traffic. If the RLC buffer payload is lower than the lower threshold of the traffic for a certain period, the system
reports the 4B event. The 4B event is implemented to detect for the decreasing of traffic. When the traffic transport is about to be finished, the traffic in the
buffer soon decreases to zero.
ID
Event4BThd
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16,D32, D64, D128,D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k, D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k,
D512k)
7/18/2011
Page 105 of 205
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16,32, 64, 128,256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k, 128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k) bytes
Setting
The default value is D128(rate < 128k), D256(rate >= 128k). The parameter is set separately in downlink and uplink.
Event 4B: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) becomes lower than an absolute threshold. When this event occurs, the
channel transmission bandwidth is reduced to avoid resource waste.
The 4B event is used to check whether the traffic becomes lighter. When the service transmission is about to finish, the traffic in the buffer decreases rapidly
until it becomes zero. Therefore, Event4BThd can be set to a low value. In addition, when the service has a stable but low source rate, Event4BThd can be
set to a proper value to detect the low source rate and decrease the channel bandwidth. The tests on the FTP service and services with low source rates
prove that Event4BThd can be set to a value close to the size of the transport block to detect the demand of decreasing the bandwidth caused by the FTP
service and services with low source rates.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LST TYPRAB to query Event4BThd.
Time to Trigger Event 4A

This describes the time to trigger the 4A event. When the traffic exceeds the upper threshold for a certain period, the system reports the 4A event.
ID
TimetoTrigger4A
Value Range
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280,2560,5000) ms
Setting
The default value is D240, namely 240 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink and downlink.
TimetoTrigger4A can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic events caused by the unstable traffic.
If TimetoTrigger4A is set to an excessively high value, the reporting of the 4A event will be delayed, and the performance of the traffic measurement report
to trace the transmission requirements for service source data is poor. Before setting TimetoTrigger4A, you need analyze the changes of buffer traffic when
there are data to be transmitted.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LST TYPRAB to query TimetoTrigger4A.
Time to Trigger Event 4B

This describes the time to trigger the 4B event. When the traffic is lower than the lower threshold for a certain period, the system reports the 4B event.
ID
TimetoTrigger4B
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 106 of 205
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Setting
The default value is D2560, namely 2560 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink and downlink.
The TimetoTrigger4B is used to prevent frequent triggering caused by small fluctuation of the traffic. This parameter indicates the time from the moment
when the traffic volume exceeds the lower threshold to the moment when an event 4B is triggered. This parameter is used to avoid unnecessary reports
triggered by traffic fluctuation
TimetoTrigger4B can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic events caused by the unstable traffic.
Before setting TimetoTrigger4B, you need analyze the changes of buffer traffic when there are data to be transmitted. You can set TimetoTrigger4B to a
comparatively high value to guarantee a good performance of service transmission.
The higher the parameter value is, the harder it is to trigger event 4B. In this case frequent adjustments of the BE service rate can be avoided. An extremely
high value, however, may lead to slow system responses. The lower the parameter value is, the easier it is to trigger event 4B. A low value, however, may
lead to frequent event triggering under small fluctuation of the traffic.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABDCCCMC to set, MOD TYPRABDCCCMC to modify, and LST TYPRAB to query TimetoTrigger4B.
Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels

These parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.
Parameter ID
UlRateUpAdjLevel
UlRateDnAdjLevel
DlRateUpAdjLevel
DlRateDnAdjLevel
Value Range
Enum(2_Rates, 3_Rates)
1, 2
Parameter Setting
The default values are both 3_Rates.
None.
Relevant Commands
The RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LST DCCC.
Uplink or Downlink DCCC Rate Threshold

When the uplink or downlink maximum rate applied for the BE service is not higher than the uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold, the system does not
reconfigure channels according to the uplink or downlink traffic.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 107 of 205
UlDcccRateThd
DlDcccRateThd
Value Range
Enum(D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
The default value of the uplink or downlink DCCC rate threshold is D64, namely 64 kbit/s.
The uplink DCCC rate threshold cannot be set to an excessively low value, and it should be higher than the minimum rate of the reverse bandwidth
required by the 384 kbit/s service. In this way, the uplink measurement reports can be effectively reduced.
To set the downlink DCCC rate threshold, consider the gain of code resource.
If the downlink DCCC rate threshold is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm is also implemented even when the applied bandwidth is rather small,
and there is only a low algorithm gain.
If the downlink DCCC rate threshold is excessively high, the DCCC algorithm cannot be implemented for some high bandwidth rates, and the code
resource is wasted.
Related Commands
For RNC-oriented parameters:
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlDcccRateThd and DlDcccRateThd.
Uplink or Downlink Middle Rate Calculate Method

This describes the uplink or downlink middle rate calculate method which can be set to HAND_APPOINT or AUTO_CALC.
ID
UlMidRateCalc
DlMidRateCalc
Value Range
AUTO_CALC, HAND_APPOINT
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is HAND_APPOINT.
This parameter is used to decide the uplink/downlink middle bite rate calculation method that applies when uplink/downlink Rate increase adjust level or
uplink/downlink Rate decrease adjust level is 3_Rates.
If uplink/downlink middle bite rate calculate method is set to AUTO_CALC, the value of uplink/downlink middle bite rate threshold is automatically
calculated by the system. The value of uplink/downlink middle bite rate threshold is equal to the RB rate closest to the highest rate divided by two.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlMidRateCalc and DlMidRateCalc.
7/18/2011
Page 108 of 205
Uplink or Downlink DCCC Middle Rate

This describes the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate. The uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is configured when 3 rate adjusting in DCCC is used
and the middle rate computing method is HAND_APPOINT. If the uplink or downlink DCCC middle rate is not configured, the middle rate equals half of
the maximum rate.
ID
UlMidRateThd
DlMidRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
UlMidRateThd and DlMidRateThd are needed only when UlMidRateCalc and DlMidRateCal (the uplink or downlink rate calculating method) are set to
HAND_APPOINT.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query UlMidRateThd and DlMidRateThd.
Low Activity Rate Threshold

This describes the low activity rate threshold. When the PS BE service rate has reduced to the rate threshold of DCCC, but the UE cannot transfer to the
CELL_FACH state for some reasons (for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is off; UE has CS service), the PS BE service rate is reduced to the
low activity rate threshold if the PS BE service satisfies the requirement of D2F.
ID
LittleRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D0, D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384).
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
None.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query LittleRateThd.
7/18/2011
Page 109 of 205
Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Throughput

This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on throughput.
Table 1 List of DCCC parameters
No. Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
HsupaDcccStg
HSUPA DCCC strategy
RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH
Set:SET DCCC
RNC
EdchRateAdjustSet HSUPA UpLink rate adjust set
HsupaInitialRate
Query:LST DCCC
Rate_128Kbps, Rate_256Kbps, Rate_608Kbps Set:SET EDCHRATEADJUSTSET
Query:LST EDCHRATEADJUSTSET
Initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic D64
Set:SET FRC
Query:LST FRC
HSUPA DCCC Strategy

This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA DCCC strategy.
HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set
This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA uplink rate adjust set.
Initial Rate of HSUPA BE Rraffic
This describes the parameter used to set the initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic.

HSUPA DCCC Strategy

This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA DCCC strategy.
ID
HsupaDcccStg
Value Range
RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH
Physical Scope
EDCH rate up and rate down, EDCH rate up
Setting
The default value is RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH.
The RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH strategy means that the rate can be both downsized and upsized.
The RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH strategy means that the rate can only be upsized.
This means UE can transit to CELL_FACH state from CELL_EDCH state at any rate.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query HsupaDcccStg.
Parent topic: Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Throughput
HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set

This describes the parameter used to set the HSUPA uplink rate adjust set.
ID
EdchRateAdjustSet
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 110 of 205
Rate_8Kbps, Rate_16Kbps, Rate_32Kbps, Rate_64Kbps, Rate_128Kbps, Rate_144Kbps, Rate_256Kbps, Rate_384Kbps, Rate_608Kbps, Rate_1450Kbps,
Rate_2890Kbps, Rate_5760Kbps
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s, 1450 kbit/s, 2890 kbit/s, 5760 kbit/s
Setting
Rate_8Kbps: Unselected
Rate_128Kbps: Selected
The more rate levels selected, the longer time subscribers reach to MBR. Subscribers feel bad but the network resource utilization increase.
The less rate levels selected, the shorter time subscribers reach to MBR. Subscribers feel good but the network resource utilization decrease.
Related Commands
Use SET EDCHRATEADJUSTSET to set and LST EDCHRATEADJUSTSET to query EdchRateAdjustSet.
Initial Rate of HSUPA BE Rraffic

This describes the parameter used to set the initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic.
ID
HsupaInitialRate
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1450, D2048, D2890, D5760
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s, 1450 kbit/s, 2890 kbit/s, 5760 kbit/s
Setting
When DCCC algorithm switch and HSUPA DCCC algorithm switch are enabled, the uplink initial bit rate will be set to this value if the uplink maximum
bit rate is higher than the initial bit rate.
The feel of subscribers and network resource utilization are considered in setting this parameter.
7/18/2011
Page 111 of 205
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query HsupaInitialRate.
Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link Quality

This describes dynamic channel configuration parameters based on link quality.
Table 1 List of DCCC parameters
SerialNo. ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
Uplink quality
measurement swithes
BeUlEvTrigInd:
SINGLE
Set:SET QOSACT
RNC
BeUlEvTrigInd
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch
Query:LST QOSACT
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch:
YES
BeUlQos5AMcSwitch
BeUlQos5AMcSwitch:
YES
BeUlQos6DMcSwitch
BeUlQos6DMcSwitch:
YES
2
UlThd6A1
UlThd6A2
Uplink quality transmit

power measurement
threshold
UlThd6A1UlThd6B1:
2 dB
UlThd6A2UlThd6B2:
10 dB
UlThd6B1
Set or modify or remove:ADD

TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MOD
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
RAB
Query:LST TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
UlThd6B2
3
StaBlkNum5A
Thd5A
Uplink quality block

error rate measurement
threshold
StaBlkNum5A: 500
Thd5A: 280
SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch Downlink quality

measurement swithes
DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch
NO
ThdEa
Downlink quality code

transmit power
measurement threshold
2 (1 dB)
EventBThred
Downlink quality
downlink RLC
measurement threshold
EventAThred: 160(16%) Set or modify or remove:ADD TYPRABRLC,

MOD TYPRABRLC, RMV TYPRABRLC
EventBThred: 80(8%)
QueryLST TYPRABRLC
UlFullCvrRate
Uplink full coverage rate 64kbit/s
ThdEb
Set:SET QOSACT
RNC
Query:LST QOSACT
Set or modify or remove:ADD
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MOD
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
RAB
Query:LST TYPRABQUALITYMEAS
6
EventAThred
RNC level:
RAB
RNC/CELL
Set:SET DCCC
8
DlFullCvrRate
Downlink full coverage

rate
32kbit/s
Query:LST DCCC
Cell level:
Set:ADD CELLDCCC
Query:LST CELLDCCC
Uplink Quality Measurement Switches

This describes the parameters used to specify the strategy of uplink quality measurement.
Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement Threshold
The parameters and UE maximum transmit power specify the threshold of 6A1, 6A2, 6B1, and 6B2 event.
Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement Threshold
This describes the uplink quality block error rate 5A event threshold.
Downlink Quality Measurement Swithes
This parameters are used to specify the strategy of downlink quality measurement.
Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement Threshold
This describes relative threshold of the Ea event. The parameter and the maximum transmit power determine the event Ea/Eb/Fa/Fb threshold of the
DL DPCCH power.
Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement Threshold
7/18/2011
Page 112 of 205
This describes the parametes, EventAThred and EventBThred.

Uplink Full Coverage Rate
This describes the uplink full coverage rate.
Downlink Full Coverage Rate
This describes the downlink full coverage rate.

Uplink Quality Measurement Switches

This describes the parameters used to specify the strategy of uplink quality measurement.
ID
BeUlEvTrigInd
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch
BeUlQos5AMcSwitch
BeUlQos6DMcSwitch
Value Range
BeUlEvTrigInd: SINGLE, COMBINE
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch: YES, NO
Physical Scope
BeUlEvTrigInd: SINGLE, COMBINE.
BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch: YES, NO
Setting
The default value of BeUlEvTrigInd is: SINGLE
The default value of BeUlQos6A1McSwitch, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch and BeUlQos6DMcSwitch are: YES
It specifies the strategy of uplink quality measurement by UE uplink transmit power, or uplink BLER, or both UE uplink transmit power and uplink
BLER. The COMBIN type is recommended to ensure the stability of link, but the scope is smaller than the SINGLE type.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSACT to set and LST QOSACT to query the parameters.
Parent topic: Dynamic Channel Configuration Parameters Based on Link Quality
Uplink Quality Transmit Power Measurement Threshold

The parameters and UE maximum transmit power specify the threshold of 6A1, 6A2, 6B1, and 6B2 event.
ID
UlThd6A1
UlThd6A2
UlThd6B1
UlThd6B2
Value Range
0 to 82
Physical Scope
0 to 82 dB, step: 1 dB
7/18/2011
Page 113 of 205
Setting
The default value of UlThd6A1 and UlThd6B1 is: 2 dB
The default value of UlThd6A2 and UlThd6B2 is: 10 dB
The higher UlThd6A1 and UlThd6B1, more sooner to trigger 6A1 and 6B1 event, more easily to down-speeding, so that keep the stability of link but the
scope is smaller.
The higher UlThd6A2 and UlThd6B2, more sooner to trigger 6A2 and 6B2 event, more easily to not up-speeding, so that keep the stability of link but the
scope is smaller.
Related Commands
Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MOD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. query: LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS.
Uplink Quality Block Error Rate Measurement Threshold

This describes the uplink quality block error rate 5A event threshold.
ID
StaBlkNum5A
Thd5A
Value Range
1 to 512
Physical Scope
1 to 512
Setting
The default value of StaBlkNum5A is 500.
This parameter defines the length of slide window.
The default value of Thd5A is 280.
This parameter sets the threshold for the number of wrong blocks of uplink CRC. If the number of wrong blocks statisticized within the length of one slide
window is larger than the threshold, 5A event is reported.
The larger the threshold is, the more difficult to trigger 5A event, and the easier to cause a call drop. The smaller the threshold is, the easier to trigger 5A
event and cause unnecessary down-speeding and handover, thus affecting the QoS.
Related Commands
Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MOD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. query: LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS.
Downlink Quality Measurement Swithes

This parameters are used to specify the strategy of downlink quality measurement.
ID
SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch
7/18/2011
Page 114 of 205
DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch
Value Range
YES, NO
Physical Scope
YES, NO
Setting
The default value of SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch and DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch are NO.
The parameters specify that downlink RLC is necessary or not.
The combination of downlink code transmit power and downlink RLC can make the measurement more strictly to ensure the stability of link, but make the
scope be smaller.
Related Commands
Use SET QOSACT to set and LST QOSACT to query the parameters.
Downlink Quality Code Transmit Power Measurement Threshold

This describes relative threshold of the Ea event. The parameter and the maximum transmit power determine the event Ea/Eb/Fa/Fb threshold of the DL
DPCCH power.
ID
ThdEa
ThdEb
Value Range
ThdEa, ThdEb0 to 111
Physical Scope
ThdEa, ThdEb: 0 dB to 55.5 dB, with the step of 0.5 dB
Setting
The default value of ThdEa and ThdEb is 2, namely 1 dB.
The higher EventEaThd is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Ea is, and it is easy to trigger event Ea and it is useful for link stability. On the
other hand, the service coverage planning is much influenced by a high EventEaThd.
The lower EventEaThd is, the more likely it is to guarantee the link stability and the less service coverage planning is affected.
Related Commands
ThdEa and ThdEb:
Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS, MOD TYPRABQUALITYMEAS and RMV TYPRABQUALITYMEAS. Query: LST
TYPRABQUALITYMEAS.
Downlink Quality Downlink RLC Measurement Threshold

This describes the parametes, EventAThred and EventBThred.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 115 of 205
EventAThred
EventBThred
Value Range
0 to 1000
Physical Scope
0 to 100%, step: 0.1%.
Setting
The default value of EventAThred is 160, namely 16.
The default value of EventBThred is 80, namely 8.
The lower EventAThred is, it is easier to trigger event A and it is useful for link stability. On the other hand, the service coverage planning is much
influenced by a low EventAThred. The higher EventAThred is, the more likely it is to guarantee the link stability and the less service coverage planning is
affected.
Related Commands
For Service-oriented parameters:
Set or modify or remove: ADD TYPRABRLC, MOD TYPRABRLC and RMV TYPRABRLC. Query: LST TYPRABRLC.
Uplink Full Coverage Rate

This describes the uplink full coverage rate.
ID
ULFullCvrRate
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
The uplink full coverage rate is the maximum uplink service rate that is reached when a cell is totally covered under some bearer.
If the maximum rate of a BE service is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm cannot easily control the rate and requires more handling workload. Therefore,
only the BE services with an uplink maximum rate higher than the threshold rate can perform the uplink coverage-based DCCC algorithm control.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query ULFullCvrRate.
For cell-oriented parameters:
Use ADD CELLDCCC to set, LST CELLDCCC to query, and MOD CELLDCCC to modify ULFullCvrRate.
Downlink Full Coverage Rate
7/18/2011
Page 116 of 205
This describes the downlink full coverage rate.

ID
DLFullCvrRate
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)
Physical Scope
Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Setting
The downlink full coverage rate is the maximum downlink service rate that is reached when the cell is totally covered. If the current rate is higher than the
full coverage rate, lower the rate to the full coverage rate after the downlink TCP is limited. If the current rate is lower than or equal to the full coverage
rate, lower the rate to the minimum guaranteed rate. If the Ea event is reported again, disconnect the links.
If the maximum rate of a BE service is excessively low, the DCCC algorithm cannot easily control the rate and requires more handling workload. Therefore,
the downlink coverage-based DCCC algorithm control can be implemented for only the BE services of which the downlink maximum rate is higher than the
threshold rate.
Related Commands
Use SET DCCC to set and LST DCCC to query DLFullCvrRate.
For cell-oriented parameters:
Use ADD CELLDCCC to set, LST CELLDCCC to query, and MOD CELLDCCC to modify DLFullCvrRate.
State Transition Parameters

This describes the state transition parameters.
Table 1 List of state transition parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
FtoDTVMThd
FACH to DCH traffic

report threshold
D1024, namely 1024 bytes
Set or modify: SET

UESTATETRANS
RNC
RtFtoDHTvmThd
Query: LST
UESTATETRANS
BeFtoHTvmThd
FtoETvmThd
2
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig
FACH to DCH traffic

time totrigger
D240, namely 240 ms
DCH to FACH state

transition timer
5s
DCH to FACH traffic

report threshold
D64, namely 64 bytes E2FThrouThd: 8 kbps
RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig
BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig
FtoETvmTimeToTrig
3
DtoFStateTransTimer
RtDH2FStateTransTimer
BeH2FStateTransTimer
E2FStateTransTimer
D2F2PTVMTHD
BeH2FTvmThd
RtDH2FTvmThd
7/18/2011
Page 117 of 205
E2FThrouThd
5
D2FTvmTimeToTrig
DCH to FACH traffic

time totrigger
D2FTvmTimeToTrig, BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig, and

E2FThrouTimeToTrig: D0, namly 0 ms
RtDH2FTvmTimeToTrig
RtDH2FTvmTimeToTrig: D240, namely 240 ms
BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig
E2FThrouTimeToTrig
6
FtoPStateTransTimer
FACH to PCH state

transition timer
180 s
CellReSelectTimer
Cell Reselection timer
180 s
FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger state transition from FACH to DCH. If the parameter is
excessively high, congestion may occur in common channels.
FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger
This describes the time to trigger the traffic transition from the FACH to the DCH. For UEs in the CELL_FACH state, if the traffic exceeds the report
threshold throughout the time length specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing state transition to the CELL_DCH state.
DCH to FACH State Transition Timer
This describes the DCH to FACH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the users in the CELL_DCH state are stably in low activity to
determine whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.
DCH to FACH Traffic Report Threshold
The parameter helps judge whether a UE is in the low activity state. Every time when a UE in the CELL_DCH state reports the 4B traffic event, 1 is
added to the low activity detection timer.
DCH to FACH Traffic Time to trigger
When the traffic volume is smaller than the lower threshold and lasts a time length, the UE report event 4B.
FACH to PCH State Transition Timer
This describes the FACH to PCH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the subscribers in the CELL_FACH state are stably in low
activity to determine whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.
Cell Reselection Timer
This describes the cell reselection timer. The cell reselection timer and CellReSelectCounter jointly check the status of the UE that frequently
performs cell reselection to determine whether there is a need of state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH.

FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold

This describes the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger state transition from FACH to DCH. If the parameter is excessively
high, congestion may occur in common channels.
ID
FtoDTVMThd
RtFtoDHTvmThd
BeFtoHTvmThd
FtoETvmThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k, D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k,
D512k, D768k)
Physical Scope
Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k, 128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes
Setting
The default value is D1024, namely 1024 bytes.
This threshold is set to check whether there is data to be transmitted so that the UE moves to the CELL_DCH substate. To avoid common channel
congestion, this parameter should not be set too high.
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query FtoDTVMThd.
Parent topic: State Transition Parameters
7/18/2011
Page 118 of 205
FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger

This describes the time to trigger the traffic transition from the FACH to the DCH. For UEs in the CELL_FACH state, if the traffic exceeds the report
threshold throughout the time length specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing state transition to the CELL_DCH state.
ID
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig
RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig
BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig
FtoETvmTimeToTrig
Value Range
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms
Setting
The default value of RtFtoDHTvmTimeToTrig is D240, namely 240 ms. The default value of FtoDTvmTimeToTrig, BeFtoHTvmTimeToTrig, and
FtoETvmTimeToTrig is D0, namely 0 ms.
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig can be properly set to avoid the unnecessary triggering of traffic events caused by the unstable traffic. An excessively high
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig may delay the reporting of the 4A event and result in congestion of the common channel.
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query FtoDTvmTimeToTrig.
DCH to FACH State Transition Timer

This describes the DCH to FACH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the users in the CELL_DCH state are stably in low activity to
determine whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.
ID
DtoFStateTransTimer
RtDH2FStateTransTimer
BeH2FStateTransTimer
E2FStateTransTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 s to 65535 s
Setting
If DtoFStateTransTimer is excessively low, it may hard to judge whether the subscriber is in relatively stable low activity status.
If DtoFStateTransTimer is excessively high, dedicated channel resources may be wasted.
7/18/2011
Page 119 of 205
DtoFStateTransTimer needs to be set on the basis of the BE service model.

Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query the parameters.
DCH to FACH Traffic Report Threshold

The parameter helps judge whether a UE is in the low activity state. Every time when a UE in the CELL_DCH state reports the 4B traffic event, 1 is added
to the low activity detection timer.
ID
D2F2PTVMTHD
BeH2FTvmThd
RtDH2FTvmThd
E2FThrouThd
Value Range
D2F2PTVMTHD, BeH2FTvmThd, RtDH2FTvmThd: D8 to D768K
E2FThrouThd: 0 to 384
Physical Scope
8bytes to 768K bytes
0 to 384 kbit/s
Setting
The default value of D2F2PTVMTHD, BeH2FTvmThd and RtDH2FTvmThd is D64, namely 64 bytes.
The default value of E2FThrouThd is 8, namely 8 kbit/s.
None.
Related Commands
DCH to FACH Traffic Time to trigger

When the traffic volume is smaller than the lower threshold and lasts a time length, the UE report event 4B.
ID
D2FTvmTimeToTrig
RtDH2FTvmTimeToTrig
BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig
E2FThrouTimeToTrig
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 120 of 205
Physical Scope
Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms
Setting
None.
Related Commands
FACH to PCH State Transition Timer

This describes the FACH to PCH state transition timer. The parameter checks whether the subscribers in the CELL_FACH state are stably in low activity
to determine whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.
ID
FtoPStateTransTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 s to 65535 s
Setting
If FtoPStateTransTimer is excessively low, it may hard to judge whether the user is in relatively stable low activity status.
If FtoPStateTransTimer is excessively high, common channel resources may be wasted.
FtoPStateTransTimer needs to be set on the basis of the BE service model.

Related Commands
Cell Reselection Timer

This describes the cell reselection timer. The cell reselection timer and CellReSelectCounter jointly check the status of the UE that frequently performs cell
reselection to determine whether there is a need of state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH.
ID
CellReSelectTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Physical Scope
1 s to 65535 s
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 121 of 205
The default value is 180, 180 s.

If CellReSelectTimer is excessively low, it is hard to judge whether the users are in relatively stable low activity.
If CellReSelectTimer is excessively high, no state transition occurs for a long time.
For a UE in CELL_PCH, if the number of cell reselection is larger than or equal to CellReSelectCounter within the CellReSelectTimer, it can be considered
that the UE is in the state of frequent cell reselection. The target state will be set to URA_PCH when the timer expired, and if the UE initiates cell update
again, RNC will enable it to transit to URA_PCH through the message CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM to UE.
Related Commands
Use SET UESTATETRANS to set and LST UESTATETRANS to query CellReSelectTimer.
PS Inactive
The common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of PS inactive parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
PsInactTmrForCon
Conversational service T1
20 s
Set or modify: SET PSINACTTIMER
RNC
PsInactTmrForStr
Streaming service T1
20 s
PsInactTmrForInt
Interactive service T1
20 s
PsInactTmrForBac
Background service T1
20 s
Query: LST PSINACTTIMER
PS Inactive Timer
This describes the timer T1 for conversational, streaming, interactive and background services. When no data is transferred during this timer for the
PS interactive subscribers, then the PDCP layer requests the RRC layer to release the connection.

PS Inactive Timer
This describes the timer T1 for conversational, streaming, interactive and background services. When no data is transferred during this timer for the PS
interactive subscribers, then the PDCP layer requests the RRC layer to release the connection.
ID
PsInactTmrForCon
PsInactTmrForStr
PsInactTmrForInt
PsInactTmrForBac
Value Range
0 to 14400
Physical Scope
0 s to 14400 s
Setting
PsInactTmrForInt can be set to have the resource of the access layer be released for the PS interactive service if no data is transmitted for the PS interactive
service for a period to promote the utilization of the cell resource.
The higher PsInactTmrForInt is, the more resource is occupied when no data is transferred.
The lower PsInactTmrForInt is, the more frequently the timer is started and the more signaling messages are transferred when data transfer is
unstable.
7/18/2011
Page 122 of 205
Related Commands
For RNC-oriented parameters, use SET PSINACTTIMER to set and LST PSINACTTIMER to query PsInactTmrForInt.
Parent topic: PS Inactive
Miscellaneous Topic Parameters

This describes the special topic parameters, including parameters for cell channel power distribution, paging, RRC connection setup, synchronization, and
location updating.
Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters

This describes the cell channel power distribution parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Paging Parameters
This describes the paging parameters that can be modified by network planners.
RRC Connection Setup Parameters
This describes the RRC connection setup parameters that can be configured by network planners.
Synchronization Parameters
This describes the synchronization parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Location Update Parameters
This describes the location update parameters that can be modified by network planners.
User Priority Parameters
This describes the user priority parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Bearer Channel Type Parameters
This describes the bearer channel type parameters.

Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters

This describes the cell channel power distribution parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters
Serial No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
MaxTxPower
Maximum cell transmit power
430, namely 43 dBm
Set: ADD CELLSETUP
Cell
PCPICHPower
PCPICH transmit power
330, namely 33 dBm

Set: ADD PCPICH
Query: LST PCPICH
Modify: MOD CELL
3
PSCHPower
Transmit power of PSCH and SSCH
-50, namely -5 dB
SSCHPower
PschPower
Set: ADD PSCH
Query LST PSCH
Modify: MOD CELL
SschPower Set: ADD SSCH
Query: LST SSCH
Modify: MOD CELL
BCHPower
BCH transmit power
-20, namely -2 dB
Set: ADD BCH

Query: LST BCH
Modify: MOD CELL
MaxFachPower
Maximum FACH transmit power
10, namely 1 dB
Set: ADD FACH
FACH
Query: LST FACH

Modify: MOD SCCPCH
6
PCHPower
PCH transmit power
20 dB
Set: ADD PCH
Cell
Query: LST PCH

Modify: MOD SCCPCH
7/18/2011
PICHPowerOffset
PICH transmit power
Page 123 of 205
-3 dB
Set: ADD CHPWROFFSET

Query: LST PICH
Modify: MOD PICHPWROFFSET
AICHPowerOffset
AICH transmit power
-6 dB
Set: ADD CHPWROFFSET

Query: LST AICH
Modify: MOD AICHPWROFFSET
Maximum Cell Transmit Power

This describes the maximum downlink transmit power of the NodeB.
This describes the power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point of the parameter is the antenna connector of NodeB, and the value of the
parameter is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit powers of the P-SCH and S-SCH relative to the PCPICH.
BCH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the PCCPCH bearing the BCH compared with the PCPICH.
Maximum FACH Transmit Power
This describes the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower relative to the PCPICH.
PCH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the PCH relative to the PCPICH.
PICH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the PICH relative to the PCPICH.
AICH Transmit Power
This describes the transmit power of the AICH relative to the PCPICH.
Parent topic: Miscellaneous Topic Parameters

Maximum Cell Transmit Power

This describes the maximum downlink transmit power of the NodeB.
ID
MaxTxPower
Value Range
0 to 500
Physical Scope
Setting
This parameter defines the sum of the maximum transmit powers of all the downlink channels in the cell at the same time. It should be set according to the
NodeB capability, cell range and capacity. The parameter is set on the basis of network planning.
If MaxTxPower is excessively low, the downlink capacity and the coverage is limited. MaxTxPower, however, should not exceed the actual processing
capability of the NodeB.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set and MOD CELLSETUP to modify MaxTxPower.
PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit powers of the P-SCH and S-SCH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
PSCHPower
7/18/2011
Page 124 of 205
SSCHPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
These two parameters can be adjusted through measurement in the actual environment so that the transmit powers of the synchronization channels just
satisfy the UE receiving demodulation requirement. Specifically, when UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of the cell, the transmit
power should be enough to ensure that the UE can implement fast synchronization in most areas at the verge of the cell. Neither PSCH nor SSCH has come
through channel code spectrum spread, so they produce more serious interference than other channels do, especially for near-end users. Therefore,
PSCHPower and SSCHPower should not be excessively high.
If PSCHPower and SSCHPower are excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in network searching, resulting in influence on coverage of the
downlink common channel. This finally affects the cell coverage.
If PSCHPower and SSCHPower are excessively high, the power resources are wasted, and other channels are interfered seriously, thus the cell
capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD PSCH to set and use LST PSCH to query PschPower.
Use ADD SSCH to set and use LST SSCH to query SschPower.
After the cell setup, both PschPower and SschPower can be modified with MOD CELL.
BCH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the PCCPCH bearing the BCH compared with the PCPICH.
ID
BCHPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
This parameter can also be adjusted and optimized through measurement in the actual environment. When UEs receive signals at different locations within
the range of the cell, the transmit power should be enough to ensure the correct demodulation of the information carried on the channel in most areas at the
verge of the cell. BCHPower should not be excessively high, so as to avoid unnecessary waste of the transmit power.
If BCHPower is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the
downlink common channel, which finally affects cell coverage.
If BCHPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD BCH to set, LST BCH to query, and MOD CELL to modify BCHPower.

This describes the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower relative to the PCPICH.
7/18/2011
Page 125 of 205
ID
MaxFachPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If the FACH power is excessively low, the UE fails to receive the FACH data packets or the UE receives error packets in a large portion; if the FACH power
is excessively high, the power is wasted. Set the maximum FACH transmit power to an appropriate value that is just enough to ensure the target BLER.
If MaxFachPower is excessively low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive correctly the services and signaling borne over the FACH, resulting in the
influence on the downlink common channel coverage and the cell coverage.
If MaxFachPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered, the downlink power resources are occupied, and consequently the cell capacity is
influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD FACH to set, LST FACH to query, and MOD SCCPCH to modify MaxFachPower.
NOTE:
In the MOD SCCPCH command, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels are respectively FACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower.
PCH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the PCH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
PCHPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If the PCH power is excessively low, the UE fails to receive the PCH data packets or the UE receives wrong packets, which may increase the retransmission
times of paging packets, resulting in the paging failure or the paging delay increase. If the PCH power is excessively high, the power is wasted.
If PCHPower is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of the
downlink common channel, which finally affects cell coverage.
If PCHPower is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the downlink power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD PCH to set, LST PCH to query, and MOD SCCPCH to modify PCHPower.
PICH Transmit Power
7/18/2011
Page 126 of 205
This describes the transmit power of the PICH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
PICHPowerOffset
Value Range
10 to 5
Physical Scope
10 dB to 5 dB
Setting
An appropriate transmit power value should be set for PICH to ensure that all the users at the cell verge can receive the paging indications. The transmit
power, however, should not be excessively high, or the power is wasted.
If PICHPowerOffset is excessively low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging messages correctly, resulting in mis-operation in reading PCH
channel and waste of the UE battery, and the downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage may be affected.
If PICHPowerOffset is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the downlink power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is
influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD CHPWROFFSET to set, LST PICH to query, and MOD PICHPWROFFSET to modify PICHPowerOffset.
AICH Transmit Power

This describes the transmit power of the AICH relative to the PCPICH.
ID
AICHPowerOffset
Value Range
22 to 5
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 6, namely -6 dB.
An appropriate transmit power value should be set for the AICH to ensure that all the users at the cell verge can receive the paging indications. The
transmit power, however, should not be excessively high to avoid power waste.
If AICHPowerOffset is excessively low, users at the verge of cells fail in receiving the system information, resulting in the influence on the coverage of
the downlink common channel, which finally affects cell coverage.
If AICHPowerOffset is excessively high, other channels are interfered seriously, the downlink transmit power is occupied, and thus the cell capacity is
influenced.
Related Commands
Use ADD CHPWROFFSET to set, LST AICH to query, and MOD AICHPWROFFSET to modify AICHPowerOffset.
Paging Parameters
This describes the paging parameters that can be modified by network planners.
7/18/2011
Page 127 of 205
Table 1 List of paging parameters

Serial No. ID
Meaning
Default Configuration MML Command
DRXCycleLenCoef
Paging cycle coefficient
MaccPageRepeatTimes Number of RNC paging repetitions 1
Level
Set or modify: SET FRC and MOD CNDOMAIN RNC

Query: LST FRC or LST CNDOMAIN
Set or modify: SET DPUCFGDATA
Query: LST DPUCFGDATA
Paging Cycle Coefficient

This describes the paging cycle coefficient. The parameter is the discontinuous receiving (DRX) cycle coefficient, and it is a parameter of paging type
1. The paging cycle coefficient falls into two categories: DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and DRX cycle coefficient of the CN domain.
Number of RNC Paging Repetitions
This describes the number of RNC paging repetitions. If the number of paging messages retransmitted by the system exceeds the parameter and there
is still no response to the pagings, the system no longer transmits the paging.

Paging Cycle Coefficient

This describes the paging cycle coefficient. The parameter is the discontinuous receiving (DRX) cycle coefficient, and it is a parameter of paging type 1. The
paging cycle coefficient falls into two categories: DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and DRX cycle coefficient of the CN domain.
ID
DRXCycleLenCoef
Value Range
UTRAN domain: 3 to 9
CN domain: 6 to 9
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default values of both the DRX cycle coefficients of the UTRAN domain and the CN domain are 6.
In the idle mode, the UE can receive the paging indication in the DRX mode to reduce the power consumption. In this case, the UE needs to detect only one
paging indication in a paging occasion within each DRX cycle. The DRX cycle length of UTRAN domain is obtained by substituting this parameter into the
formula DRX cycle = 2K PBP frames.
Where, K is the paging cycle coefficient, and PBP is the number of paging block periods (In the FDD mode, PBP = 1).
If DRXCycleLenCoef is excessively low, the UE detects the paging channel frequently, and thus the battery is consumed fast.
If DRXCycleLenCoef is excessively high, the UE reacts very slowly to paging indications, and the system may repeatedly page the UE, resulting in
increased downlink interference.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set the DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain.
Use ADD CNDOMAIN to set and MOD CNDOMAIN to modify the DRX cycle coefficient of the CN domain.
The DRX cycle coefficients of both the UTRAN domain and the CN domain must be set. Use LST FRC and LST CNDOMAIN to respectively query the
DRX cycle coefficient of the UTRAN domain and the DRX cycle coefficient of the CN domain.
Parent topic: Paging Parameters
Number of RNC Paging Repetitions

This describes the number of RNC paging repetitions. If the number of paging messages retransmitted by the system exceeds the parameter and there is still
no response to the pagings, the system no longer transmits the paging.
ID
MaccPageRepeatTimes
7/18/2011
Page 128 of 205
Value Range
0 to 2
Physical Scope
0 to 2 times
Setting
In order to increase the paging success rate, the CN and RNC both repeat paging messages. The paging repetition, however, has negative effects: it increases
the paging messages, especially in the condition of downlink common channel congestion on the air interface; therefore, the downlink channel resources are
wasted and new paging messages cannot be timely delivered.
If the RNC continuously transmits two paging messages of Type 1, the interval of the two paging messages is a paging period.
To guarantee a high paging success rate and high paging efficiency, the number and time interval of paging repetitions of the CN must be set on the basis of
the number of UTRAN paging repetitions. If the UTRAN retransmits the paging message once, the time interval for CN paging repetitions should be longer
than two DRX periods.
The CN cannot retransmit the next paging message until the UTRAN finishes transmitting and retransmitting the previous paging message. Therefore, the
number and time interval of RNC paging repetitions, the number of UTRAN paging repetitions, and DRX paging period need to be adjusted together.
If MaccPageRepeatTimes is excessively high, the system repeatedly pages UEs, the downlink common channel resources are wasted, and the downlink
interference increases.
Related Commands
Use SET DPUCFGDATA to set and LST DPUCFGDATA to query MaccPageRepeatTimes.
Parent topic: Paging Parameters
RRC Connection Setup Parameters

This describes the RRC connection setup parameters that can be configured by network planners.
Table 1 List of RRC connection setup parameters
Serial No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
T300
T300 timer
T300: D2000 (2 s)
Set: SET IDLEMODETIMER
RNC
N300
N300 constant
N300: 3
Query: LST IDLEMODETIMER
T300 and N300

This describes the T300 timer and the constant N300. The UE starts the T300 timer after sending the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message and
stops the T300 timer upon receiving the RRC CONNECTION SETUP message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of retransmitted RRC
CONNECTION REQUEST messages is smaller than N300, the UE continues to retransmit the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the T300
timer times out and the number of retransmitted RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages exceeds N300, the UE enters idle mode.

T300 and N300

This describes the T300 timer and the constant N300. The UE starts the T300 timer after sending the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message and stops
the T300 timer upon receiving the RRC CONNECTION SETUP message. If the T300 timer times out and the number of retransmitted RRC
CONNECTION REQUEST messages is smaller than N300, the UE continues to retransmit the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message. If the T300 timer
times out and the number of retransmitted RRC CONNECTION REQUEST messages exceeds N300, the UE enters idle mode.
ID
T300
N300
Value Range
T300: Enum (D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000)
N300: 0 to 7
7/18/2011
Page 129 of 205
Physical Scope
T300: Enum (100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000, 8000) ms
N300: None
Setting
The default value of T300 is D2000, namely 2 s. The default value of N300 is 3.
The setting of timer T300 should be considered together with the UE and UTRAN processing delay and the propagation delay. The higher T300 is, the
longer the UE waits. The higher N300 is, the higher success probability of the RRC connection setup is, and the longer RRC setup time it takes. If N300 is
excessively high, it is likely that a UE repeats access attempts and connection setup requests, and consequently other UEs are influenced seriously.
Related Commands
Use SET IDLEMODETIMER to set and LST IDLEMODETIMER to query T300 and N300.
Parent topic: RRC Connection Setup Parameters
Synchronization Parameters
This describes the synchronization parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of synchronization parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
NInsyncInd
Number of successive in-sync indications
Set: ADD CELLSETUP
Cell
NOutsyncInd Number of successive out-of-sync indications
50
Query: LST CELL
TRLFailure
Radio link failure timer duration
50 (5 s)
N312
When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts the timer
T312, and after the UE detects N312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops
the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.
T312
N312: D1
T312: 6 s
Modify: MOD CELL

Set or modify: SET
IDLEMODETIMER
RNC
Query: LST
IDLEMODETIMER
5
N313
N315
After the UE detects N313 successive out-of-sync indications from L1, it

starts the timer T313. After the UE detects N315 successive in-sync
indications from L1, it stops timer T313.
T313
N313: D50 Set or modify: SET

N315: D1 CONNMODETIMER
T313: 3 s
Query: LST
CONNMODETIMER
Number of Successive In-Sync Indications

This describes the number of successive in-sync indications.
Number of Successive Out-of-Sync Indications
This describes the number of successive out-of-sync indications.
Radio Link Failure Timer Duration
This describes the duration of the radio link failure timer. When the radio link set is in the synchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure
after it receives successive out-of-sync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the timer TRlFailure after
receiving successive in-sync indications of the number defined by NInsyncInd. When the timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link
failure process, and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.
T312 and N312
This describes the T312 timer and the constant N312. When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts the timer T312, and after the UE
detects N312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.
N313, N315, and T313
This describes the constants N313 and N315 and the timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N313) of successive outof-sync indications from L1, the UE starts the timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N315) of successive in-sync
indications from L1, the UE stops the timer T313. Once the timer expires, the radio link is disconnected.

Number of Successive In-Sync Indications

This describes the number of successive in-sync indications.
ID
NInsyncInd
7/18/2011
Page 130 of 205
Value Range
1 to 256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
This parameter defines the of successive in-sync indications required for the NodeB to trigger the radio link recovery process. The radio link set remains in
the initial state until it has received a certain number (the number is defined by NInsyncInd) of successive in-sync indications from L1, and then the NodeB
triggers the radio link recovery process, which indicates that the radio link set has been synchronized. Once the radio link recovery process is triggered, the
radio link set is considered to be in the synchronized state.
The higher NInsyncInd is, the stricter the synchronization process becomes, and the more difficult the synchronization occurs.
The lower NInsyncInd is, the easier the synchronization occurs.
If the link quality is poor, a simple synchronization requirement leads to waste of the UE power and increase of uplink interference. In the radio link
maintenance process, NInsyncInd is used together with the successive out-of-sync indication counter.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set, LST CELL to query, and MOD CELL to modify NInsyncInd.
Parent topic: Synchronization Parameters
Number of Successive Out-of-Sync Indications

This describes the number of successive out-of-sync indications.
ID
NOutsyncInd
Value Range
1 to 256
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
NOutsyncInd defines the number of successive out-of-sync indications required to receive before starting the timer TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in
synchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure after it receives successive out-of-sync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The
NodeB shall stop and reset the timer TRlFailure after receiving successive in-sync indications of the number defined by NInsyncInd. When the timer
TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure process, and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.
If NOutsyncInd is excessively high, the link out-of-sync decision is likely to happen.

If NOutsyncInd is excessively low, the link out-of-sync decision is not likely to happen. But if the link quality is poor, it may result in a waste of the UE
power and increased uplink interference.
In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is used together with the successive in-sync indication counter.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set, LST CELL to query and MOD CELL to modify NOutsyncInd.
Radio Link Failure Timer Duration

This describes the duration of the radio link failure timer. When the radio link set is in the synchronized state, the NodeB starts the timer TRlFailure after it
receives successive out-of-sync indications of the number defined by NOutsyncInd. The NodeB shall stop and reset the timer TRlFailure after receiving
7/18/2011
Page 131 of 205
successive in-sync indications of the number defined by NInsyncInd. When the timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure process,
and indicates which radio link set is out-of-sync.
ID
TRLFailure
Value Range
0 to 255
Physical Scope
0 s to 25.5 s, with the step of 0.1 s
Setting
If TRLFailure is excessively low, there are few chances for the radio link to get synchronized.
If TRLFailure is excessively high, the radio link failure process is probably delayed, and the downlink interference increases.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLSETUP to set, use LST CELL to query and use MOD CELL to modify TRLFailure.
T312 and N312

This describes the T312 timer and the constant N312. When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts the timer T312, and after the UE detects
N312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops the timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical channel setup fails.
ID
T312
N312
Value Range
T312: 1 to 15
N312: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)
Physical Scope
T312: 1 s to 15 s
N312: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)
Setting
The default value of N312 is D1, namely 1, and the default value of T312 is 6, namely 6 s.
The higher N312 is, the more difficult the dedicated channel synchronization becomes.
The higher T312 is, the higher the synchronization probability is, but the longer the synchronization time it takes.
Related Commands
Idle mode:
Use SET IDLEMODETIMER to set and LST IDLEMODETIMER to query N312 and T312.
Connected mode:
Use SET CONNMODETIMER to set and LST CONNMODETIMER to query N312 and T312.
7/18/2011
Page 132 of 205
N313, N315, and T313

This describes the constants N313 and N315 and the timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N313) of successive out-of-sync
indications from L1, the UE starts the timer T313. After detecting a certain number (the number is defined by N315) of successive in-sync indications from
L1, the UE stops the timer T313. Once the timer expires, the radio link is disconnected.
ID
N313
N315
T313
Value Range
N313: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200)
N315: Enum (D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)
T312: 1 to 15
Physical Scope
N313: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200)
N315: Enum (1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)
T312: 1 s to 15 s
Setting
The default value of N313 is D50; the default value of N315 is D1; the default value of T313 is 3, namely 3 s.
The higher N313 is, the more difficult it is to start the timer T313, and the lower the out-of-sync probability is.
The lower N315 is, the longer T313 is, and the higher the link recovery probability is.
Related Commands
Use SET CONNMODETIMER to set and LST CONNMODETIMER to query N313, N315, and T313.
Location Update Parameters

This describes the location update parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of location update parameters
Serial No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
T3212
Periodic location update timer
10, that is, 1 hour
Set: ADD CNDOMAIN
RNC
Query: LST CNDOMAIN

Modify: MOD CNDOMAIN
Periodical Location Update Timer

This describes the time duration of the periodical location update timer.

Periodical Location Update Timer

This describes the time duration of the periodical location update timer.
ID
T3212
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 133 of 205
0 to 255
Physical Scope
0 to 1530 minutes, with the step of 6 minutes
Setting
The default value is 10, namely 1 hour.
If T3212 is 0, no location update is needed. T3212 is valid only when the CN domain identifier is CS_DOMAIN.
If the timer T3212 is not started, the system starts the timer T3212 when the UE enters NORMAL SERVICE or ATTEMPTing TO UPDATE sub-mode of
MM IDLE mode, and then the UE sends the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message. If the UE receives the LOCATION UPDATING ACCEPT,
LOCATION UPDATING REJECT, or AUTHENTICATION REJECT message, the system stops and initializes the timer T3212. Then the system starts a
location update again after the UE enters NORMAL SERVICE or ATTEMPTing TO UPDATE mode. If the timer T3212 expires, the system initializes the
timer and starts a location update again.
If T3212 is excessively low, the UE performs location updates frequently, resulting in a large number of location update messages on the Uu and Iu
interfaces.
If T3212 is excessively high, the UE location information may not be updated timely.
Related Commands
Use ADD CNDOMAIN to set, LST CNDOMAIN to query, and MOD CNDOMAIN to modify T3212.
Parent topic: Location Update Parameters
User Priority Parameters

This describes the user priority parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of user priority parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
ARP1Priority
User priorities corresponding to allocation or retention

priority 1 to 14
None.
Set: SET USERPRIORITY
RNC
ARP2Priority
Query: LST
USERPRIORITY
ARP3Priority
ARP4Priority
ARP5Priority
ARP6Priority
ARP7Priority
ARP8Priority
ARP9Priority
ARP10Priority
ARP11Priority
ARP12Priority
ARP13Priority
ARP14Priority
2
PriorityReference
CarrierTypePriorInd Indicator of carrier type priority
Integrated priority configuration reference
ARP
DCH
User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention Priority 1 to 14

This describes the user priorities corresponding to allocation or retention priority 1 to 14.
Intergated Priority Configuration Reference
This describes the reference used to determine which priority is arranged at the first in the priority sequence.
Indication of Carrier Type Priority
This describes the indication that indicates which carrier type (DCH or HSPA) has the higher priority when both carrier types have the same priority
of ARP and TrafficClass.
7/18/2011
Page 134 of 205

User Priorities Corresponding to Allocation or Retention Priority 1 to 14

This describes the user priorities corresponding to allocation or retention priority 1 to 14.
ID
ARP1Priority
ARP2Priority
ARP3Priority
ARP4Priority
ARP5Priority
ARP6Priority
ARP7Priority
ARP8Priority
ARP9Priority
ARP10Priority
ARP11Priority
ARP12Priority
ARP13Priority
ARP14Priority
Value Range
Gold, Sliver, Copper
Physical Scope
1, 2, 3
Setting
None.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query the user priorities corresponding to the allocation or retention priorities.
Parent topic: User Priority Parameters
Intergated Priority Configuration Reference

This describes the reference used to determine which priority is arranged at the first in the priority sequence.
ID
PriorityReference
Value Range
ARP, TrafficClass
Physical Scope
1, 2
7/18/2011
Page 135 of 205
Setting
The default value is ARP.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query PriorityReference.
Indication of Carrier Type Priority

This describes the indication that indicates which carrier type (DCH or HSPA) has the higher priority when both carrier types have the same priority of
ARP and TrafficClass.
ID
CarrierTypePriorInd
Value Range
NONE, DCH, HSPA
Physical Scope
0, 1, 2
Setting
The default value is NONE.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET USERPRIORITY to set and LST USERPRIORITY to query CarrierTypePriorInd.
Bearer Channel Type Parameters

This describes the bearer channel type parameters.
Table 1 List of bearer channel type parameters
Serial
NO.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
VoipChlType
Priority type of the bearer channel for the

VoIP
DCH
Set: SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA
RNC
ImsChlType

IMS signaling
DCH
SrbChlType

SRB
DCH
SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag Flag of effecting SrbChlType at the RRC

stage
FALSE
DlStrThsOnHsdpa
Downlink streaming traffic threshold on

HSDPA
64 kbit/s
DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa
Downlink BE traffic threshold on HSDPA
64 kbit/s
UlStrThsOnHsupa
Uplink streaming traffic threshold on

HSUPA
256 kbit/s
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa
Uplink BE traffic threshold on HSUPA
608 kbit/s
UlBeTraffDecThs
Uplink and downlink BE traffic decision

threshold on DCH
8 kbit/s
Query: LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA
Set: SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA/ADD

CELLFRC
7/18/2011
Page 136 of 205
DlBeTraffDecThs
Query: LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA/LST

CELLFRC
10
ImsBearEnhancedSwitch
Enhanced switch of the IMS signaling

bearer
OFF
11
ImsInitialAccessRate
Initial access rate of the IMS signaling
32 kbit/s
Set: SET FRC

Query: LST FRC
Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIP

This parameter indicates the type of the VoIP bearer channel.
Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS Signaling
This parameter indicates the type of the IMS signaling.
Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRB
This parameter indicates the type of the SRB.
Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC Stage
This parameter indicates whether SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is established and at other stages, or takes effect only at other
stages.
Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPA
The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain streaming service to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum Downlink service rate is
greater than or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA
The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service
rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA
The rate decision threshold of Uplink PS domain streaming service to be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum Uplink service rate is greater than
or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on E-DCH.
Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA
The rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is
greater than or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on E-DCH.
Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCH
The default rate decision threshold of uplink and downlink PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on DCH. If the FRC
parameters of the best cell cannot be obtained, this default value will be used. When the uplink and downlink service rate is greater than or equal to
this threshold, the service will be set up on DCH. Otherwise, on CCH.
Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling Bearer
This parameter indicates whether to enable the function of configuring the initial bandwidth of the IMS signaling at the background.
Initial Access Rate of the IMS Signalling
This parameter indicates the initial bandwidth of the IMS signalling configured at the background.

Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the VoIP

This parameter indicates the type of the VoIP bearer channel.
ID
VoipChlType
Value Range
DCH, HSDPA, HSPA
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is DCH.
DCH means the VoIP service is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the VoIP is carried by the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the VoIP is carried
by the HSDPA and HSUPA channels.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query VoipChlType.
Parent topic: Bearer Channel Type Parameters
Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the IMS Signaling
7/18/2011
Page 137 of 205
This parameter indicates the type of the IMS signaling.

ID
ImsChlType
Value Range
DCH, HSDPA, HSPA
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
DCH means the IMS signaling is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the IMS signaling is carried by the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the IMS
signaling is carried by the HSDPA and HSUPA channels.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query ImsChlType.
Priority Type of the Bearer Channel for the SRB

This parameter indicates the type of the SRB.
ID
SrbChlType
Value Range
DCH, HSDPA, HSPA
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
DCH means the SRB is carried by the DCH channel. HSDPA means the SRB is carried by the HSDPA channel. HSPA means the SRB is carried by the
HSDPA and HSUPA channels.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query SrbChlType.
Flag of Effecting SrbChlType at the RRC Stage

This parameter indicates whether SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is established and at other stages, or takes effect only at other stages.
ID
SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 138 of 205
FALSE, TRUE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
TRUE means SrbChlType takes effect when the RRC connection is established and at other stages. FALSE means SrbChlType takes effect only at other
stages.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag.
Downlink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSDPA

The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain streaming service to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum Downlink service rate is greater
than or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
ID
DlStrThsOnHsdpa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s
Setting
The streaming service is fit to be carried on the cell with abundance power resource, such as indoor cell. The bottleneck of such cell usually is channel code
resource.
If the service is carried on DCH, the higher the rate, the more the channel code needed. If the service is carried on HS-DSCH, the change of channel code
needed is small when the rate getting higher. So that the high-speed service is fit to carried on HS-DSCH.
If the parameter is set to low, the capacity of HS-DSCH may be lower than that of DCH.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query DlStrThsOnHsdpa.
Downlink BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA

The rate decision threshold of Downlink PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is
greater than or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on HS-DSCH. Otherwise, on DCH.
ID
DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048
Physical Scope
7/18/2011
Page 139 of 205
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 768 kbit/s, 1024 kbit/s, 1536 kbit/s, 1800 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s
Setting
HS-DSCH channel is a resource sharing channel. If the burst BE service is carried on HS-DSCH, the time utilization of subscribers increase, converge the
transmit data, save the power resource. So that all the BE service is recommended to be carried on HS-DSCH.
If the parameter is set too large, the utilization of system resource will be lower.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa.
Uplink Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

The rate decision threshold of Uplink PS domain streaming service to be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum Uplink service rate is greater than or
equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on E-DCH.
ID
UlStrThsOnHsupa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s
Setting
None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query UlStrThsOnHsdpa.
Uplink BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

The rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater
than or equal to this threshold, the service will be carried on E-DCH.
ID
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D1800, D2048
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 768 kbit/s, 1024 kbit/s, 1536 kbit/s, 1800 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 140 of 205
Through the emulationwhen data service is carried on E-DCH, system capacity increase rather than that is carried on R99 channel. So that all the BE
service can be carried on E-DCH.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA to query UlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa.
Uplink and Downlink BE Traffic Decision Threshold on DCH

The default rate decision threshold of uplink and downlink PS domain background or interactive service to be carried on DCH. If the FRC parameters of
the best cell cannot be obtained, this default value will be used. When the uplink and downlink service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the
service will be set up on DCH. Otherwise, on CCH.
ID
UlBeTraffDecThs
DlBeTraffDecThs
Value Range
D8, D16
Physical Scope
8, 16. unit: kbit/s
Setting
The service carried on DCH can obtain better rate and consume more system resource. So low-speed service is often carried on CCH, and the high-speed
service is carried on DCH.
Related Commands
Use SET FRCCHLTYPEPARA or ADD CELLFRC to set and LST FRCCHLTYPEPARA or LST CELLFRC to query the parameters.
Enhanced Switch of the IMS Signaling Bearer

This parameter indicates whether to enable the function of configuring the initial bandwidth of the IMS signaling at the background.
ID
ImsBearEnhancedSwitch
Value Range
OFF, ON
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
OFF means the function is disabled. ON means the function is enabled.
None.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ImsBearEnhancedSwitch.
7/18/2011
Page 141 of 205

Initial Access Rate of the IMS Signalling

This parameter indicates the initial bandwidth of the IMS signalling configured at the background.
ID
ImsInitialAccessRate
Value Range
D32, D64
Physical Scope
32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s
Setting
This parameter takes effect when the IMS signalling enhanced switch is enabled.
If this parameter is set to 32 kbit/s, a higher bandwidth utilization can be obtained, but the access delay of the IMS service is longer. If this parameter is set
to 64 kbit/s, a shorter service access delay can be obtained, but the bandwidth utilization is lower.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query ImsInitialAccessRate.
HSDPA Parameters
This describes HSDPA parameters as follows: HSDPA power resource management parameters, HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters,
HSDPA mobility management parameters, HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call admission control algorithm
parameters.
HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters

This describes the HSDPA power resource management parameters. Based on three different UE capabilities, the minimum TTI interval for UE to
receive data on HS-PDSCH is 1, 2, or 3 TTIs. For the default configuration, inside the brackets is the physical value while outside the brackets is the
cell value.
HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters
This describes the HSDPA code resource management parameters that can be modified by network planners.
HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.
HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch Parameters
This describes the HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters that can be modified by network planners.
HSDPA Admission Control Parameters
This describes the HSDPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.

HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters

This describes the HSDPA power resource management parameters. Based on three different UE capabilities, the minimum TTI interval for UE to receive
data on HS-PDSCH is 1, 2, or 3 TTIs. For the default configuration, inside the brackets is the physical value while outside the brackets is the cell value.
HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant

This describes the HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant that can be modified by network planners.
F-DPCH Power Control Parameter
This describes the F-DPCH power control RNC-oriented parameters.
Parent topic: HSDPA Parameters

7/18/2011
Page 142 of 205
HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant

This describes the HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 HSPA total power and measurement power offset constant
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
HspaPower
Power offset of the total power of HSPA relative to the cell maximum 0 dB
transmit power
HsPdschMPOConstEnum Measurement power offset constant. Measure Power Offset = Min

2.5 dB
(13,CellMaxPower - PcpichPower - Measure Power Offset Constant)
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
Set: ADD
CELLHSDPA
Cell
Query: LST
CELLHSDPA
Modify: MOD
CELLHSDPA
HSPA Total Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum
transmit power of a cell.
Measurement Power Offset Constant
This describes the constant that is used to calculate the measurement power offset (MPO).
Parent topic: HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters

HSPA Total Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit
power of a cell.
ID
HspaPower
Value Range
500 to 0
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of is 0, namely 0 dB.
The maximum value for dynamic power adjustment affects the throughput of HSDPA subscribers on the edge of a cell.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify the total HSPA power.
Parent topic: HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant
Measurement Power Offset Constant

This describes the constant that is used to calculate the measurement power offset (MPO).
ID
HsPdschMPOConstEnum
Value Range
3 to 19
Physical Scope
7/18/2011
Page 143 of 205
Setting
The default value is 2.5, namely 2.5 dB.
It helps calculate the MPO ().
Measure Power Offset = Max ( -6, Min (13, CellMaxPower - PcpichPower - Measure Power Offset Constant))
According to the formula PHSPDSCH = PCPICH + + , calculate PHSPDSCH, and then convert it to CQI. This parameter is used to adjust the distribution of
CQI reported by UE. In order to schedule and resource allocate based on correct channel quality on the network side, make sure that the value of CQI
cannot be 0 or 30.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify HsPdschMPOConstEnum.
Parent topic: HSPA Total Power and Measurement Power Offset Constant
F-DPCH Power Control Parameter

This describes the F-DPCH power control RNC-oriented parameters.
Table 1 List of F-DPCH parameters
Serial NO.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
FdpchPO2
F-DPCH power offset
3 dB
Set: SET FPDCHPARA
RNC
FDPCHMAXREFPWR
F-DPCH maximum reference power
-3 dB
Set: SET FDPCHRLPWR
FDPCHMINREFPWR
F-DPCH minimum reference power
-20 dB
Query: LST FDPCHRLPWR
Query: LST FPDCHPARA
F-DPCH Power Offset

The parameter indicating the power offset of TPC command on F-DPCH channel relative to Reference F-DPCH TX power
F-DPCH Maximum Reference Power
This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH maximum transmit power.
F-DPCH Minimum Reference Power
This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH minimum transmit power.
Parent topic: HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters

F-DPCH Power Offset

The parameter indicating the power offset of TPC command on F-DPCH channel relative to Reference F-DPCH TX power
ID
FdpchPO2
Value Range
0 to 24
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value of is 12, namely 3 dB.
If the parameter is set too large, some power will be wasted. If the parameter is set too low, the quality of F-DPCH can't be ensured.
Related Commands
Use SET FDPCHPARA to set, LST FDPCHPARA to query.
Parent topic: F-DPCH Power Control Parameter
7/18/2011
Page 144 of 205
F-DPCH Maximum Reference Power

This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH maximum transmit power.
ID
FDPCHMAXREFPWR
Value Range
-350 to 150
Physical Scope
-35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB
Setting
If the parameter is set too large, the F-DPCH power will be largely consumed. If the parameter is set too small, the F-DPCH coverage can't be ensured.
Related Commands
Use SET FDPCHRLPWR to set, LST FDPCHRLPWR to query.
F-DPCH Minimum Reference Power

This parameter is used to limit the F-DPCH minimum transmit power.
ID
FDPCHMINREFPWR
Value Range
-350 to 150
Physical Scope
-35 dB to 15 dB, with the step of 0.1 dB
Setting
If the parameter is set too large, the F-DPCH power will be largely consumed. If the parameter is set too small, the F-DPCH power control may be longer.
Related Commands
Use SET FDPCHRLPWR to set, LST FDPCHRLPWR to query.
HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters

This describes the HSDPA code resource management parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSDPA code resource management parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
AllocCodeMode
HSDPA code resource allocation mode (Manual, Automatic)
Automatic
Set: ADD CELLHSDPA Cell
Level
7/18/2011
HsPdschCodeNum
HsPdschMaxCodeNum Maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. Valid when

AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.
10
HsPdschMinCodeNum Minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. Valid when

AllocCodeMode is set to Automatic.
HsScchCodeNum
Number of HS-PDSCH codes. Valid when AllocCodeMode is set

to Manual.
Page 145 of 205
Number of HS-SCCH codes
Query: LST
CELLHSDPA
Modify: MOD
CELLHSDPA
HSDPA Code Resource Allocation Mode

This describes the HSDPA code resource allocation mode: automatic or manual.
Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This describes the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Manual.
Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This describes the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to
Automatic.
Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This describes the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to
Automatic.
Number of HS-SCCH Codes
This describes the number of codes allocated for the HS-SCCH.

HSDPA Code Resource Allocation Mode

This describes the HSDPA code resource allocation mode: automatic or manual.
ID
AllocCodeMode
Value Range
Automatic, Manual
Physical Scope
Automatic means automatic allocation. Manual means manual allocation.
Setting
The default value is Automatic.
At the early stage of network construction, or when the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is not fixed, AllocCodeMode can be set to Automatic to have the
HSDPA channel codes be automatically allocated. If the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is fixed and known, AllocCodeMode can be set to Manual to
select the static allocation mode.
Manual allocation leads to restriction of HSDPA code resource or leaves HSDPA code resource idle.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify AllocCodeMode.
Parent topic: HSDPA Code Resource Management Parameters
Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This describes the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to Manual.
ID
HsPdschCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
7/18/2011
Page 146 of 205
Setting
HsPdschCodeNum is set according to actual traffic model of a cell. The default value of HsPdschCodeNum is 4.
If HsPdschCodeNum is excessively low, the HSDPA code resource is restricted.

If HsPdschCodeNum is excessively high, the HSDPA code resource is wasted and the admission rejection rate of R99 services increases due to code
resource.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify HsPdschCodeNum.
Maximum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This describes the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to
Automatic.
ID
HsPdschMaxCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
HsPdschMaxCodeNum is set according to the actual traffic model of a cell. The default value of HsPdschMaxCodeNum is 10.
In automatic HSDPA code allocation mode, set the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes to a comparatively high value.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify HsPdschMaxCodeNum.
Minimum Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This describes the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. The minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes is valid only when AllocCodeMode is set to
Automatic.
ID
HsPdschMinCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
HsPdschMinCodeNum is set according to the actual traffic model of a cell. The default value of HsPdschMinCodeNum is 5.
In automatic HSDPA code allocation mode, set the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes to a comparatively low value. In addition, HsPdschMinCodeNum
must be not higher than HsPdschMaxCodeNum.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 147 of 205
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify HsPdschMinCodeNum.
Number of HS-SCCH Codes

This describes the number of codes allocated for the HS-SCCH.
ID
HsScchCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
HsScchCodeNum is set according to actual traffic model of a cell. The default value of HsScchCodeNum is 4.
HsScchCodeNum decides the maximum number of subscribers that the NodeB can schedule in a TTI period. In the scenarios like outdoor macro cells with
power restricted, it is less likely to schedule multiple subscribers simultaneously, so two HS-SCCHs are configured. In the scenarios like indoor pico with
code restricted, it is more likely to schedule multiple subscribers simultaneously, so four HS-SCCHs are configured. If excessive HS-SCCHs are configured,
the code resource is wasted. If insufficient HS-SCCHs are configured, the HS-PDSCH code resource or power resource is wasted. Both affect the cell
throughput rate.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSDPA to set, LST CELLHSDPA to query, and MOD CELLHSDPA to modify HsScchCodeNum.
HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters

The common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.
Table 1 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters
Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
HSPATIMERLEN
HSPA handover protection length
0 (0 s)
Set or modify:SET HOCOMM
RNC
Query: LST HOCOMM
HSPA Handover Protection Length

According to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee that HSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect
system performance. When event 1D triggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D does not trigger HSPA
handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event 1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA
handover will never be triggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.

HSPA Handover Protection Length

According to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee that HSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system
performance. When event 1D triggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D does not trigger HSPA handover. If
the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event 1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never
be triggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.
Parameter ID
HSPATIMERLEN
Value Range
7/18/2011
Page 148 of 205
0 to 1024
0 s to 1024 s
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0 s.
The serving cell is updated between different NodeBs. The buffer of original MAC-hs is reset, so the data in the buffer is missing. As a result, the
interruption time of data transfer exists. The length of interruption time of data transfer is relevant to implementation of flow control algorithm and RLC
parameter configuration. The unit is hundred mill-second.
In the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, if the process occurs frequently, the subscriber keeps in the state of restoring data transfer, interruption of
data transfer, and then restoring data transfer. This impacts the average throughput.
Set this parameter to control the frequency of update of serving cell. As a result, the impact of the process on performance of HSPA data transfer is
controlled. If the flow control algorithm can control data in MAC-hs buffer accurately, set the parameter to 0.
If the parameter is too large in the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, report event 1D by UE before expiration is more probable. When the UE
reports event 1D before expiration, due to the parameter restriction, the serving cell keeps being weak cell. As a result, the throughput declines.
Figure 1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length

Set it properly to restrict the frequency to update serving cell in the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals. This helps control the interruption of data
transfer in serving cell update between different NodeBs. It also helps control the impact on subscriber throughput.
Relevant Commands
Set it through SET HOCOMM. Query it through LST HOCOMM.
Parent topic: HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters
HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch Parameters

This describes the HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSDPA direct retry and channel type switch parameters
Serial No. ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
HRetryTimerLen
D2H retry timer length
5s
Set: SET COIFTIMER
RNC
D2HIntraHoTimerLen
Timer length of D2H intra-frequency handover
2s
D2HInterHoTimerLen
Timer length of D2H inter-frequency handover
5s
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen
Timer length of multi-carrier handover
14 s
HsdpaCMPermissionInd
CM permission indicator on HSDPA
TURE
Query: LST COIFTIMER

Set: SET HOCOMM
Query: LST HOCOMM
Set: SET CMCF
Query: LST CMCF
D2H Retry Timer Length

This describes the D2H retry timer length. If a service is preferably to be mapped to the HS-DSCH but is actually mapped to the DCH, the D2H retry
timer starts. If H2D occurs, the D2H retry timer starts only after the D2H punishment timer expires.
Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length
This describes the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H intrafrequency handover timer and performs the D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover supports HSDPA or has a DRD
neighboring cell. If the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the intra-frequency
handover.
Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length
This describes the D2H inter-frequency handover timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H interfrequency handover timer and performs the D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover does not support HSDPA but has
a DRD neighboring cell. If the inter-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the inter-frequency
handover.
Multi-Carrier Handover Timer Length
This describes the multi-carrier handover timer length. To prevent ping-pong handovers between multiple carriers, which have a bad effect on the
system performance, a protect timer MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is needed. After the UE is handed over from cell A, the timer starts up. Before the
timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA service is not directly redirected to cell A. If the timer length is set to 0, the timer does not start up, that is, it
does not prevent the ping-pong handovers between multiples carriers.
Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA
This describes the compress mode permission indication on HSDPA. If the compress mode permission indication is set to TRUE, the CM (Compress
7/18/2011
Page 149 of 205
Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and HSDPA can exist with CM activated. If the compress mode permission indication is set to FALSE, H2D is needed
before the CM is activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA cannot exist when CM is activated.
D2H Retry Timer Length

This describes the D2H retry timer length. If a service is preferably to be mapped to the HS-DSCH but is actually mapped to the DCH, the D2H retry timer
starts. If H2D occurs, the D2H retry timer starts only after the D2H punishment timer expires.
ID
HRetryTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 180
Physical Scope
0, 1 to 180 s
Setting
The default value is 5 (5 s).
When the D2H timer is set to 0, the H retry function is closed.
If HRetryTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H handover does not occur when the subscribers data can be carried on HSDPA. This affects subscriber
perception.
If HRetryTimerLen is excessively low, useless direct retry occurs. As a result, extra signaling interaction occurs and the network resource is wasted.
Related Commands
Use SET COIFTIMER to set and LST COIFTIMER to query HRetryTimerLen.
Parent topic: HSDPA Direct Retry and Channel Type Switch Parameters
Intra-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length

This describes the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H intra-frequency
handover timer and performs the D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover supports HSDPA or has a DRD neighboring cell.
If the intra-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the intra-frequency handover.
ID
D2HIntraHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999
Physical Scope
0 s to 999 s
Setting
If D2HIntraHoTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H is not triggered in time after an intra-frequency handover. This may affect the QoS.
If D2HIntraHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and D2H may occur in some scenarios.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and user LST HOCOMM to query D2HIntraHoTimerLen.
7/18/2011
Page 150 of 205
Inter-Frequency Handover D2H Timer Length

This describes the D2H inter-frequency handover timer length. After a UE finishes the intra-frequency handover, the system starts the D2H inter-frequency
handover timer and performs the D2H retry after the timer expires, if the current cell after the handover does not support HSDPA but has a DRD
neighboring cell. If the inter-frequency handover D2H timer length is set to 0, the D2H retry is triggered immediately after the inter-frequency handover.
ID
D2HInterHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 180
Physical Scope
0 s to 180 s
Setting
If D2HInterHoTimerLen is excessively high, the D2H is not triggered in time after an inter-frequency handover. This may affect the QoS.
If D2HInterHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and D2H may occur in some scenarios.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set and LST HOCOMM to query D2HInterHoTimerLen.
Multi-Carrier Handover Timer Length

This describes the multi-carrier handover timer length. To prevent ping-pong handovers between multiple carriers, which have a bad effect on the system
performance, a protect timer MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is needed. After the UE is handed over from cell A, the timer starts up. Before the timer expires, the
HSDPA or HSUPA service is not directly redirected to cell A. If the timer length is set to 0, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not prevent the pingpong handovers between multiples carriers.
ID
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999
Physical Scope
0 s to 999 s
Setting
If MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is excessively high, the handover to the original cell may not be triggered in time after multi-carrier handovers. This may
affect the QoS.
If MultiCarrierHoTimerLen is excessively low, the ping-pong handover between multiple carriers occurs in some scenarios.
Related Commands
Use SET HOCOMM to set DivCtrlField and LST HOCOMM to query MultiCarrierHoTimerLen.
Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA

This describes the compress mode permission indication on HSDPA. If the compress mode permission indication is set to TRUE, the CM (Compress Mode)
is permitted on HSDPA, and HSDPA can exist with CM activated. If the compress mode permission indication is set to FALSE, H2D is needed before the
CM is activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA cannot exist when CM is activated.
7/18/2011
Page 151 of 205
ID
HsdpaCMPermissionInd
Value Range
FALSE (not permitted), TRUE (permitted)
Physical Scope
0, 1
Setting
The default value is TRUE.
If the terminal supports this function, the terminal has a better performance when the CM is activated with HSDPA connected.
Related Commands
Use SET CMCF to set and LST CMCF to query HsdpaCMPermissionInd.
HSDPA Admission Control Parameters

This describes the HSDPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of admission control parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum Maximum number of HSDPA users of the

NodeB
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
3840
Set: ADD NODEBALGOPARA
NodeB
Query: LST
NODEBALGOPARA
Modify: MOD
NODEBALGOPARA
2
UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor
UL HS-DPCCH reserve factor
HsdpaStrmPBRThd
HSDPA streaming PBR threshold
70%
HsdpaBePBRThd
HSDPA BE service PBR threshold
30%
MaxHSDSCHUserNum
Maximum number of users supported by the

HS-DSCH
64
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeB

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel per NodeB.
Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor
This describes the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor. If the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK and NACK messages, the system does not perform the
CAC. If the HS-DPCCH bears CQI messages, the system performs the CAC. The uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor is the resource reserved when the
uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK/NACK messages. The CAC threshold equals the product of the UL limit capacity and the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve
factor.
HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold
This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.
HSDPA BE Service PBR Threshold
This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.
Maximum HSDPA User Number
This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel.

Maximum HSDPA Users Per NodeB

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel per NodeB.
ID
NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum
7/18/2011
Page 152 of 205
Value Range
0 to 3840
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum is set according to the product specification and actual number of sold HSDPA licenses.
If the HSDPA user connection is rejected by the NodeB, you can infer that the HSDPA licenses are insufficient. We need to apply for new HSDPA licenses.
Related Commands
Use ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MOD NODEBALGOPARA to modify NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum.
Parent topic: HSDPA Admission Control Parameters
Uplink HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor

This describes the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor. If the uplink HS-DPCCH bears ACK and NACK messages, the system does not perform the CAC. If
the HS-DPCCH bears CQI messages, the system performs the CAC. The uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor is the resource reserved when the uplink HSDPCCH bears ACK/NACK messages. The CAC threshold equals the product of the UL limit capacity and the uplink HS-DPCCH reserve factor.
ID
UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 1, with the step of 0.01
Setting
Because the current ACK and NACK channel power on the HS-DPCCH is included in the public measurement of the Iub interface, the uplink HS-DPCCH
reverse factor is set according to the ACK/NACK load that may burst on the HS-DPCCH during the interval of two measurement processes. In general, the
burst data in such a short time rarely have any impact, so the uplink HS-DPCCH reverse factor can be set to 0 by default.
If UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor is excessively high, the probability of admission rejection increases.

If UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor is excessively low, the reserved uplink resource is insufficient. But because the probability of the burst load of ACK/NACK
messages is low and the effect is small, UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor can be set to a comparatively lower value so as to admit more connections.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor.
HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold

This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.
ID
HsdpaStrmPBRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
7/18/2011
Page 153 of 205
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
For the HSDPA admission, the system needs to meet the following condition:
, where,
PBRstrm is the total throughput of the streaming service provided by the cell.
Thdhsdpa_strm_PBR is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming service.

This parameter is likely a active factor of streaming service. If the HsdpaStrmPBRThd is excessively high, the admission mistaken rejection rate may
increase. If the HsdpaStrmPBRThd is excessively low, the mistakenly admission rate may increase, the GBR of subscribers cannot be guaranteed.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify HsdpaStrmPBRThd.
HSDPA BE Service PBR Threshold

This describes the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.
ID
HsdpaBePBRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
For the HSDPA admission, the system needs to meet the following condition:
, where,
PBRBE is the total throughput of the BE service provided by the cell.

Thdhsdpa_BE_pbr is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA BE service.

This parameter is likely a active factor of BE service. If the HsdpaBePBRThd is excessively high, the admission mistaken rejection rate may increase. If the
HsdpaBePBRThd is excessively low, the mistakenly admission rate may increase, the GBR of subscribers cannot be guaranteed.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify HsdpaBePBRThd.
Maximum HSDPA User Number

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA channel.
ID
MaxHSDSCHUserNum
Value Range
0 to 64
7/18/2011
Page 154 of 205
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The number of subscribers supported by the HSDPA refers to the number of subscribers whose service is carried by the HSDPA channel, no matter how
many RABs are borne by the HSDPA channel. The highest value of MaxHSDSCHUserNum equals the cell HSDPA capacity that is prescribed in the NodeB
product specification. MaxHSDSCHUserNum can be set according to the cell type, the available power of HSDPA, and the code resource.
If MaxHSDSCHUserNum is excessively low, the HSDPA capacity of cell may be reduced, causing a waste of the HSDPA resource.
If MaxHSDSCHUserNum is excessively high, the congestion of HSDPA service may be caused.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MaxHSDSCHUserNum.
HSUPA Parameters
This describes the HSUPA parameters: HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and HSUPA admission
control parameters.
HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters

This describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
HSUPA Admission Control Parameters
This describes the HSUPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters
This describes the HSUPA outer loop power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.


This describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
MaxTargetUlLoadFactor
Maximum target uplink load factor
75%
Set: ADD CELLHSUPA
Cell
NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio Target non-serving E-DCH to total E-DCH power

ratio
Query: LST
CELLHSUPA
Hsupa2msTtiRateThs
384 kbit/s
Set: SET FRC
Rate Threshold for HSUPA 2 ms TTI
RNC
Query: LST FRC
Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor

This describes the target uplink load factor of the NodeB scheduling module. The RNC calculates the maximum RTWP value according to this factor,
and then sends it to the NodeB by the Iub message.
Only HSUPA services with uplink bit rate reaching this threshold can use 2ms as their E-DCH TTI value, otherwise use 10ms as the E-DCH TTI
value.
Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio
This describes the threshold of the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power. The non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the
UE only when the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power is higher than this threshold.
Parent topic: HSUPA Parameters

Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor

This describes the target uplink load factor of the NodeB scheduling module. The RNC calculates the maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and
then sends it to the NodeB by the Iub message.
7/18/2011
Page 155 of 205
ID
MaxTargetUlLoadFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
This parameter is set according to the radio network planning.
If MaxTargetUlLoadFactor is excessively low, the cell throughput is excessively low.

If MaxTargetUlLoadFactor is excessively high, the interference is excessively high.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSUPA to set and LST CELLHSUPA to query MaxTargetUlLoadFactor.
Parent topic: HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters

Only HSUPA services with uplink bit rate reaching this threshold can use 2ms as their E-DCH TTI value, otherwise use 10ms as the E-DCH TTI value.
ID
Hsupa2msTtiRateThs
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D608, D1450
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s, 608 kbit/s, 1450 kbit/s
Setting
If the parameter is set too low, the low-speed service use the 2 ms TTI which lead to the waste of CE resource. If the parameter is set too high, the highspeed service cannot use the 2 ms TTI which lead to influence on QoS of traffic.
Related Commands
Use SET FRC to set and LST FRC to query Hsupa2msTtiRateThs.
Threshold of Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio

This describes the threshold of the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power. The non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE
only when the ratio of the non-serving E-DCH power to the total E-DCH power is higher than this threshold.
ID
NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
7/18/2011
Page 156 of 205
0% to 100%
Setting
This parameter is used to decide whether the non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to the UE.
If NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio is excessively low, the power of non-serving RL is very low, and the UE data rate is affected when the UE is in soft
handover status.
If NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio is excessively high, the non-serving RL can not send RG DOWN to the UE even if the system is overloaded.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLHSUPA to set and use LST CELLHSUPA to query NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio.
HSUPA Admission Control Parameters

This describes the HSUPA admission control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSUPA admission control parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
MAXHSUPAUSERNUM
Maximum number of users supported by

the HSUPA
64
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
HsupaNonServInterfereFactor
HSUPA Non-serveice cell interfere factor
HsupaLowPriorityUserPBRThd
PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different

priority users
100/100/100
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
HsupaEqualPriorityUserPBRThd
HsupaHighPriorityUserPBRThd
4
DLHSUPARSVDFACTOR
DL HSUPA reserved factor
NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum
Maximum number of users of the HSUPA

in the NodeB
3840
Set: ADD NODEBALGOPARA
NodeB
Query: LST
NODEBALGOPARA
Modify: MOD
NODEBALGOPARA
Maximum HSUPA User Number

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel. The parameter is used for the HSUPA admission control.
HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere Factor
This parameter indicates that the ratio of uplink interference generated by the non-service RL in an HSUPA cell to the total uplink interference.
PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority users
This group of parameters indicates the threshold of PBR satisfaction decision. The parameter affects HSUPA scheduling service access. The QoS
satisfaction of the existing service is used to allow new users to access.
Downlink HSUPA Reserved Factor
This describes the downlink HSUPA reserved factor. The parameter is used to reserve part of resource for downlink control channels: E-AGCH, ERGCH, and E-HICH.
Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeB
This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel per NodeB.

Maximum HSUPA User Number

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel. The parameter is used for the HSUPA admission control.
ID
MaxHsupaUserNum
Value Range
0 to 100
7/18/2011
Page 157 of 205
Physical Scope
0 to 100
Setting
This parameter represents the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel and is set according to the product specification. For the
HSUPA admission, the number of subscribers must be counted first. If the current HSUPA subscriber number is lower than this parameter, the admission
request is being analyzed, or else, the admission is rejected directly.
If MaxHsupaUserNum is excessively high, the product capacity cannot support all the HSUPA users after admission, and cannot provide satisfying
services.
If MaxHsupaUserNum is excessively low, part of the subscribers are rejected for admission, and part of the resource is idle and wasted, thus
decreasing the system capacity.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MaxHsupaUserNum.
Parent topic: HSUPA Admission Control Parameters
HSUPA Non-Serveice Cell Interfere Factor

This parameter indicates that the ratio of uplink interference generated by the non-service RL in an HSUPA cell to the total uplink interference.
ID
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0 to 100%
Setting
The ratio of HSUPA users and soft handover in the system is considered when setting this parameter. If the ratio of HSUPA users and soft handover in the
system is large, this parameter should be increased.
If HsupaNonServInterfereFactor is excessively low, the product capacity cannot support all the HSUPA users after admission, and cannot provide
satisfying services.
If HsupaNonServInterfereFactor is excessively high, part of the subscribers are rejected for admission, and part of the resource is idle and wasted,
thus decreasing the system capacity.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify HsupaNonServInterfereFactor.
PBR satisfaction for HSUPA different priority users

This group of parameters indicates the threshold of PBR satisfaction decision. The parameter affects HSUPA scheduling service access. The QoS
satisfaction of the existing service is used to allow new users to access.
ID
Value Range
0 to 100
7/18/2011
Page 158 of 205
Physical Scope
0 to 100%
Setting
During setting, the characteristics of the scheduling service, the setting of GBR and GBR guarantee strategy should be considered. To ensure GBR of users,
set the parameter to 100. If the requirement for GBR is low, the parameter can be set to a value less than 100.
If the parameter is set too large, the requirement for users PBR satisfaction is higher, and the probability of refusing HSUPA scheduling service increases,
thus affecting access success rate. If the value is too small, the requirement for users PBR satisfaction is lower, and too many HSUPA scheduling service
users may be accessed, thus affecting the satisfaction of accessed users and resulting in system congestion due to serious load.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify the parameters.
Downlink HSUPA Reserved Factor

This describes the downlink HSUPA reserved factor. The parameter is used to reserve part of resource for downlink control channels: E-AGCH, E-RGCH,
and E-HICH.
ID
DlHSUPARsvdFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
Setting
The higher DlHSUPARsvdFactor is, the more resource is reserved for the HSUPA control channel, and thus the more resource is wasted.
If DlHSUPARsvdFactor is excessively low, the HSUPA service quality is affected when the resource is limited.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify DlHSUPARsvdFactor.
Maximum HSUPA User Number Per NodeB

This describes the maximum number of subscribers supported by the HSUPA channel per NodeB.
ID
NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum
Value Range
0 to 3840
Physical Scope
0 to 3840
Setting
7/18/2011
Page 159 of 205

NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum is set according to the product specification and actual number of sold HSUPA licenses.
If the HSUPA subscriber connection is rejected by the NodeB, you can infer that the HSUPA licenses are insufficient. We need to apply for new HSUPA
licenses.
Related Commands
Use ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MOD NODEBALGOPARA to modify NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum.
HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters

This describes the HSUPA outer loop power control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSUPA outer loop power control parameters
Serial No. ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
EdchTargetRetransNum
Target number of E-DCH PDU retransmission
0.1
Set: ADD TYPRABOLPC
RAB
ResBLER
Target value of E-DCH residual BLER
N/A
Query: LST TYPRABOLPC

Modify: MOD TYPRABOLPC
HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Switch

This switch is used to select HSUPA outer loop power control algorithm.
Target Number of E-DCH PDU Retransmission
This parameter specifies the target number of E-DCH PDU Mac-es retransmission.
Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLER
This parameter indicates the target transmission quality of E-DCH, that is, the target residual BLER value.

HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Switch

This switch is used to select HSUPA outer loop power control algorithm.
Parameter ID
OlpcAlgSwitch
Value Range
Enum (BASEDONRESIDUALBLER, BASEDONMEANNHT)
BASEDONRESIDUALBLER, BASEDONMEANNHT
Parameter Setting
For BE and streaming services, set this parameter to BASEDONMEANNHT.
For conversational services, set this parameter to BASEDONRESIDUALBLER.
None.
Relevant Commands
Use ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query and MOD TYPRABOLPC to modifyOlpcAlgSwitch.
Parent topic: HSUPA Outer Loop Power Control Parameters
Target Number of E-DCH PDU Retransmission
7/18/2011
Page 160 of 205
This parameter specifies the target number of E-DCH PDU Mac-es retransmission.
ID
EdchTargetRetransNum
Value Range
0 to 150
Physical Scope
0 to 15, step is 0.1.
Setting
The default value is 1, namely 0.1.
The smaller the parameter is, the better subscribers feel, but the air interface capacity is not the maximum. The rate of subscriber, air interface capacity,
and CE resource consumed are considered for the parameter setting.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query, and MOD TYPRABOLPC to modify EdchTargetRetransNum.
Target Value of E-DCH Residual BLER

This parameter indicates the target transmission quality of E-DCH, that is, the target residual BLER value.
ID
ResBLER
Value Range
0 to 1000
Physical Scope
0 to 1, step is 0.001.
Setting
None.
If the parameter is set too small, the subscribers feel better, but the air interface capacity is not the maximum. The rate of subscriber, air interface capacity,
and CE resource consumed are considered for the parameter setting.
Related Commands
Use ADD TYPRABOLPC to set, LST TYPRABOLPC to query, and MOD TYPRABOLPC to modify ResBLER.
MBMS Parameters
This describes MBMS parameters. MBMS parameters are MBMS admission parameters, MBMS preemption parameters, and FLC/FLD algorithm
parameters.
MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm Parameters

This describes the MBMS admission and preemption algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters
This describes the FLC/FLD algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

7/18/2011
Page 161 of 205
MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm Parameters

This describes the MBMS admission and preemption algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
Level
MaxFachPower
Maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the

MBMS service
Set various values

according to the service
rate.
Set: ADD FACH
Cell
MTCHMinPerc0
Minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service

with the highest priority, that is, priority 0
80%
Set: ADD
CELLMBMSFACH
MTCHMaxPerc15
Minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service

with the lowest priority, that is, priority 15
50%
Query: LST
CELLMBMSFACH
MtchRsvPwr
MTCH budget power resource
20%
Set: ADD CELLCAC
MtchRsvsf
MTCH budget code resource
16 SF64
Query: LST CELLCAC
MtchMaxPwr
MTCH maximum power
60%
MtchMaxsf
MTCH maximum code resource
40 SF64
Modify: MOD
CELLCAC
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
A service priority threshold, indicating that the power

of the MBMS services with a priority lower than this
threshold can be decreased
Set: ADD CELLLDR
Query: LST FACH
Query: LST CELLLDR

Modify: MOD
CELLLDR
MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch MBMS service preempt algorithm switch
OFF
Set: SET
QUEUEPREEMPT
Query: LST
QUEUEPREEMPT
10
PtmPreemptSwitch
MBMS PTM preempt switch
ON
11
PtmStrmPasiSwitch
MBMS streaming PTM preempt switch
ON
12
PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch
MBMS non-streaming PTM preempt switch
ON
Set: SET
RNCMBMSPARA
RNC
Query: LST
RNCMBMSPARA

This describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.
Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the highest priority, that is, priority 0.
Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the lowest priority, that is, priority 15.
MTCH Budget Power Resources
This parameter is configured according to the budget for power and code resources of the MBMS PTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers.
MTCH Budget Code Resource
MTCH Maximum Power
This parameter indicates the MTCH maximum power of a MBMS cell.
MTCH Maximum Code Resource
This parameter indicates the MTCH maximum code resource of a MBMS cell.
Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power
This describes the service priority threshold for decreasing power. The power of the MBMS services with a priority lower than this threshold can be
decreased.
MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm Switch
This describes the MBMS preemption algorithm switch. When this switch is ON, an MBMS service can obtain resources through preemption in case
the access of the MBMS service fails. The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.
MBMS PTM Preempt Switch
This parameter is configured according to the requirements of operators.
MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt Switch
MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt Switch
Parent topic: MBMS Parameters


This describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 162 of 205
MaxFachPower
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
Set various values for MaxFachPower according to the service rate.
Because the FACH does not have the power control function, you must consider the QoS of the subscribers on the edge of a cell when setting the maximum
transmit power of the FACH.
If MaxFachPower is excessively low, the quality for receiving services on the edge of a cell decreases and the mosaic effect and the service delay occur.
If MaxFachPower is excessively high, the extra power of the FACH is wasted.
RAN6.1 supports only the MBMS broadcast function. Thus, all cells must use the PTM transmission mode. This means that all cells use the FACH to send
data. An UE can obtain remarkable gain through soft combination or selective combination. According to the emulation result, the gain obtained through
soft combination ranges from 4.6 dB to 6.6 dB and the gain obtained through selective combination ranges from 2 dB to 3 dB. In terms of the MBMS
terminal, you must choose selective combination for the integrated channel of the CMB and the MBMS. Thus, by taking the generated gain into account,
you can configure a lower power for the FACH when a majority of terminals in a network support the MBMS service.
CAUTION:
The CMB terminals do not support soft combination or selective combination. Therefore, if a majority of terminals support the CMB service, you can
neglect the relevant gain when configuring the FACH.
Related Commands
Use ADD FACH to set and LST FACH to query MaxFachPower.
Parent topic: MBMS Admission and Preemption Algorithm Parameters
Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest

Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the highest priority, that is, priority 0.
ID
MTCHMinPerc0
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
When a cell has a heavy load, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoids the further deterioration of cell congestion and increases the
success rate of MBMS service setup. You must ensure that the assigned low power can cover the minimum coverage area of the MBMS service. The
minimum coverage area is set on the basis of the percentage of area covered by the MBMS service using the maximum transmit power of the FACH.
To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area varies according to service priorities. The value of MTCHMinPerc0
is in positive correlation with the coverage area of the MBMS service when the cell load is high.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMBMSFACH to set andLST CELLMBMSFACH to query MTCHMinPerc0.
7/18/2011
Page 163 of 205
Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest

Priority
This describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service with the lowest priority, that is, priority 15.
ID
MTCHMinPerc15
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
When a cell has a heavy load, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoids the further deterioration of cell congestion and increases the
success rate of MBMS service setup. You must ensure that the assigned low power can cover the minimum coverage area of the MBMS service. The
minimum coverage area is set on the basis of the percentage of area covered by the MBMS service using the maximum transmit power of the FACH.
To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area varies according to service priorities. The value of
MTCHMinPerc15 is in positive correlation with the coverage area of the MBMS service when the cell load is high.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMBMSFACH to set andLST CELLMBMSFACH to query MTCHMinPerc15.
MTCH Budget Power Resources

ID
MtchRsvPwr
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal to MtchRsvPwr, and the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell
is less than or equal to MtchRsvSF, the established MBMS PTM bearer can only be preempted by the MBMS PTM bearer with higher priority, and cannot
be preempted by the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS bearer.
This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low power resource consumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM
bearer being preempted, because this bearer serves multiple users at the same time. This threshold should not be set to a large one, otherwise, the system
resources will be consumed by the MBMS PTM bearer, and few non-MBMS service capability will be left.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MtchRsvPwr.
7/18/2011
Page 164 of 205
MTCH Budget Code Resource

ID
MtchRsvsf
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
64 SF64
Setting
The default value is 16, namely 16 SF64.
When the power sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is less than or equal to MtchRsvPwr, and the code sum of all the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell
is less than or equal to MtchRsvSF, the established MBMS PTM bearer can only be preempted by the MBMS PTM bearer with higher priority, and cannot
be preempted by the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS bearer.
This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low code resource consumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MtchRsvsf.
MTCH Maximum Power

This parameter indicates the MTCH maximum power of a MBMS cell.
ID
MtchMaxPwr
Value Range
0 to 100
Physical Scope
0% to 100%
Setting
This parameter is configured according to the budget for power of the MBMS PTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers. When the power sum of all
the MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is larger than this threshold, the MBMS PTM bearer whose access is refused can only preempt the MBMS PTM bearer
with low priority, and cannot preempt the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS bearer.
This parameter is a kind of protection for the MBMS PTM bearer, In case of low code resource consumption, it is necessary to prevent the MBMS PTM
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MtchMaxPwr.
MTCH Maximum Code Resource
7/18/2011
Page 165 of 205
ID
MtchMaxsf
Value Range
0 to 63
Physical Scope
64 SF64
Setting
The default value is 40, namely 40 SF64.
This parameter is configured according to the budget for code of the MBMS PTM bearer (that is MTCH) made by carriers. When the code sum of all the
MBMS PTM bearers in a cell is larger than this threshold, the MBMS PTM bearer whose access is refused can only preempt the MBMS PTM bearer with
low priority, and cannot preempt the MBMS PTP bearer or non-MBMS bearer.
This parameter is a kind of limit to the MBMS PTM bearer. When the total code resources of the bearer are consumed largely, excessive consumption
should be avoided. This threshold should not be set to a large one. Otherwise, the system resource will be consumed by the MBMS PTM bearer and few
non-MBMS service capability will be left.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLCAC to set, LST CELLCAC to query, and MOD CELLCAC to modify MtchMaxsf.
Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power

This describes the service priority threshold for decreasing power. The power of the MBMS services with a priority lower than this threshold can be
decreased.
ID
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
Value Range
1 to 15
Physical Scope
1 to 15
Setting
The MBMS service at each rate is set on the basis of two power levels. The power set for an MBMS service is determined according to cell load during the
service access. In addition, the FACH power of the MBMS service must be decreased as required in the duration of cell congestion. Some services with high
priority, for example the disaster pre-alert, however, do not need the coverage shrink caused by cell load. In such a case, you can adjust the service priority
threshold to protect the services with high priority against the impact of the service access failure and the load control algorithm.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLLDR to set, LST CELLLDR to query, and MOD CELLLDR to modify MbmsDecPowerRabThd.
MBMS Service Preemption Algorithm Switch

This describes the MBMS preemption algorithm switch. When this switch is ON, an MBMS service can obtain resources through preemption in case the
access of the MBMS service fails. The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.
ID
7/18/2011
Page 166 of 205
MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting
The periodic re-setup of the preempted MBMS service is not implemented in RAN6.1. As a result, an MBMS service cannot be sent in a cell if the resource
for the MBMS service is occupied by another service through preemption. Therefore, the switch is OFF by default.
Related Commands
Use SET QUEUEPREEMPT to set and LST QUEUEPREEMPT to query MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch.
MBMS PTM Preempt Switch

ID
PtmPreemptSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM bearer is allowed to preempt other MBMS service bearers or non-MBMS service bearers. If the parameter is set to
OFF, preemption is forbidden.
If the parameter is set to ON, preemption may be triggered in case of failure of access to the PTM bearer. The MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service
bearer with low priority will be released, thus resulting in traffic interruption.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to query PtmPreemptSwitch.
MBMS Streaming PTM Preempt Switch

ID
PtmStrmPasiSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
7/18/2011
Page 167 of 205
Setting
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer is preempted by the MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority.
If the parameter is set to OFF, preemption is forbidden.
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer may be preempted by the MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high
priority in case of resource congestion, thus resulting in MBMS service interruption. Because the PTM service bearer serves multiple users, the influence
scope of service interruption is wide.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to query PtmStrmPasiSwitch.
MBMS Non-Streaming PTM Preempt Switch

ID
PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer is preempted by the MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high priority.
If the parameter is set to OFF, preemption is forbidden.
If the parameter is set to ON, the PTM streaming service bearer may be preempted by the MBMS service bearer or non-MBMS service bearer with high
priority in case of resource congestion, thus resulting in MBMS service interruption. Because the PTM service bearer serves multiple users, the influence
scope of service interruption is wide.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to query PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch.
FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters

This describes the FLC/FLD algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
FlcAlgoSwitch
FLC algorithm switch
ON
Set: ADD CELLMCCH
Cell
Query: LST CELLMCCH

Modify: MOD CELLMCCH
2
MbmsTransMode
MBMS transmission
mode
PTM
NCountingThd
Counting threshold
Set: SET RNCMBMSPARA orADD SAMBMSPARA

orADD CELLMBMSPARA
RNC/SA/Cell
Query: LST RNCMBMSPARA orLST SAMBMSPARA or

LST CELLMBMSPARA
7/18/2011
NPtpToPtmOffset
PTP to PTM offset
Page 168 of 205
Modify: MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD

CELLMBMSPARA
MbmsPtpUlBitRate MBMS PTP RB uplink

rate
16 kbit/s
Set: SET RNCMBMSPARA
MbmsNCellInd
TRUE
RNC
Query: LST RNCMBMSPARA

MBMS neighboring cell
indicator
Set: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL
Cell
Query: LST INTRAFREQNCELL

Modify: MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
FLC Algorithm Switch

This describes the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is enabled, the RNC performs FLC operations.
MBMS Transmission Mode
This describes the transmission mode of MBMS.
Counting Threshold
When the counting or recounting UE is larger than the parameter, then use the PTM transmission mode, otherwise use the PTP transmission mode.
PTP To PTM Offset
This describes the offset from PTP to PTM.
MBMS PTP RB Uplink Rate
This describes the MBMS PTP uplink bit rate.
MBMS Neighboring Cell Indicator
This parameter indicates whether the cell is MBMS neighboring cell or not.
Parent topic: MBMS Parameters

FLC Algorithm Switch

This describes the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is enabled, the RNC performs FLC operations.
ID
FlcAlgoSwitch
Value Range
ON, OFF
Physical Scope
ON, OFF
Setting
The FLC algorithm is a mandatory algorithm. When the network starts sending the MBMS service, the FLC algorithm ensures that the subscribers on the
other frequency points can reselect the current frequency point for receiving the MBMS service. Therefore, the FLC algorithm is enabled by default.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMCCH to set, LST CELLMCCH to query, and MOD CELLMCCH to modify FlcAlgoSwitch.
Parent topic: FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters
MBMS Transmission Mode

This describes the transmission mode of MBMS.
ID
MbmsTransMode
Value Range
PTM~0/ PTP~1/ ENHANCEDPTM~2/ DYNAMIC~3
Physical Scope
PTM/PTP/ENHANCEDPTM/DYNAMIC
7/18/2011
Page 169 of 205
Setting
The default value is PTM.
This parameter can be configured for the RNC or service area(SA).
If for the RNC, all the cells under the RNC adopt the transmission mode. If for the SA, all the cells under the SA adopt the transmission mode.
PTM, PTP and ENHANCEDPTM, as static or semi-static transmission modes, have small effect on the MBMS service and network performance.
The DYNAMIC mode is the most complicated. To balance the service quality guarantee and network resource utilization, dynamically convert PTP and
PTM modes. The network converts transmission modes periodically according to the number of users and the state of neighboring cells, so the reception of
MBMS users may be affected. In addition, when passing the boundary of a PTP cell or a PTM cell, MBMS users may be aware of service interruption, thus
greatly affecting the MBMS service and network performance.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA orADD SAMBMSPARA orADD CELLMBMSPARA to set, LST RNCMBMSPARA orLST SAMBMSPARA or LST
CELLMBMSPARA to query, and MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify MbmsTransMode.
Counting Threshold
When the counting or recounting UE is larger than the parameter, then use the PTM transmission mode, otherwise use the PTP transmission mode.
ID
NCountingThd
Value Range
210
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
Comprehensively configure such resources as power, code, CE and transmission of the PTM bearer and PTP bearer. Suppose that the consumption of the
PTM bearer resources is two times the average consumption of the PTP bearer resources, the parameter is configured as 2. This parameter can be
configured for RNC, SA or CELL.
The greater the parameter, the higher the probability of the network to adopt PTP transmission mode. Although the power consumption of PTP may be less
than that of PTM, the code, CE and transmission occupied by the PTP bearer increase as the number of subscribers increases. This parameter should be
configured by considering various resources and bottleneck resources of operators so that it should not be set too large.
Related Commands
CELLMBMSPARA to query, and MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify NCountingThd.
PTP To PTM Offset

This describes the offset from PTP to PTM.
ID
NPtpToPtmOffset
Value Range
15
Physical Scope
7/18/2011
Page 170 of 205
None.
Setting
To avoid ping-pong of PTP and PTM transmission modes, adopt dual-threshold control as mode conversion decision. That is, in the initial state or PTM
mode, the PTM mode is adopted if the number of MBMS subscribers exceeds NCountingThd, otherwise, the PTP mode is adopted. But in the PTP mode,
the PTM mode is adopted if the number of MBMS users exceeds NCountingThd+NPtpToPtmOffset, otherwise, the PTP mode is adopted. This parameter
can be configured for RNC, SA or Cell.
Although dual-threshold control is adopted, this parameter only acts as hysteresis. The configuration of this parameter should not affect the whole decision
policy. In addition, NCountingThd should not be too large. The smaller this parameter, the better.
It is recommended to keep the default value.
Related Commands
CELLMBMSPARA to query, and MOD SAMBMSPARA or MOD CELLMBMSPARA to modify NPtpToPtmOffset.
MBMS PTP RB Uplink Rate

This describes the MBMS PTP uplink bit rate.
ID
MbmsPtpUlBitRate
Value Range
D8~0, D16~1, D32~2, D64~3, D128~4, D144~5, D256~6
Physical Scope
8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s
Setting
The default value is D16~1, namely 16 kbit/s.
MBMS service is a unidirectional downlink service. But for the PTP bearer, an uplink channel must be established for signaling transmission. Because the
uplink signaling traffic is not heavy, the uplink channel width can be configured as a small one.
If the parameter is set too large, uplink resources will be wasted. Therefore, the default value is recommended.
Related Commands
Use SET RNCMBMSPARA to set and LST RNCMBMSPARA to queryMbmsPtpUlBitRate.
MBMS Neighboring Cell Indicator

This parameter indicates whether the cell is MBMS neighboring cell or not.
ID
MbmsNCellInd
Value Range
TRUE, FALSE
Physical Scope
None.
7/18/2011
Page 171 of 205
Setting
The default value is TRUE.
In an actual commercial network, there may be multiple intra-frequency neighboring cells around a cell. Such a design can further limit the number of
neighboring cells affecting the transmission mode of this cell.
If the MbmsTransMode is set to DYNAMIC, and a cell is not in the elementary congestion state and the PTP transmission mode is shown in the statistical
result of the number of users in the cell, the final transmission mode is PTM mode if only a PTM mode is shown in the statistical result of the number of
subscribers in an MBMS neighboring cell.
The more the intra-frequency neighboring cells are configured as MBMS neighboring cells, the easier the transmission mode of this cell is determined as
PTM, and the higher the ratio of PTM transmission mode in the whole network is. In terms of performance of the whole network, if the number of
subscribers reaches a certain scale, the higher the ratio of PTM transmission mode, the better. Because the higher the ratio, the greater the MBMS
consolidatory gain obtained by subscribers, the less the conversion between PTP and PTM modes, and the lower the service influence. But, if there are a few
subscribers in the whole network, the high ratio of PTM transmission mode will waste resources and affect other service capacities.
Related Commands
Use ADD INTRAFREQNCELL to set, LST INTRAFREQNCELL to query, and MOD INTRAFREQNCELL to modify MbmsNCellInd.
Algorithm Switches
This describes the RNC algorithm Switches. In the RNC, algorithm switches are categorized into connection-oriented algorithm switches and cell-oriented
algorithm switches.
Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC

This describes the connection-oriented algorithm switches in the RNC. In the RNC, the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective only
within the duration of a cell, that is, the modification of an algorithm switch is not effective for the UEs that are already in connection mode before the
modification but effective for the UEs that are connected later. The enabling and disabling of the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective
for the entire RNC, but cannot be controlled for single cells.
Cell Algorithm Switches
This describes the cell algorithm switches, which are valid for single cells. Different cells can have different algorithm configurations. The algorithm
switches become effective as soon as they are configured.
Other Algorithm Switches
This describes some other algorithm switches, such as the Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iub bandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm
switch, and intra-frequency measurement control information indication.

Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC

This describes the connection-oriented algorithm switches in the RNC. In the RNC, the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective only within the
duration of a cell, that is, the modification of an algorithm switch is not effective for the UEs that are already in connection mode before the modification
but effective for the UEs that are connected later. The enabling and disabling of the connection-oriented algorithm switches are effective for the entire RNC,
but cannot be controlled for single cells.
On the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SET CORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch
through LST CORRMALGOSWITCH.
Channel Class Algorithm Switches

This describes the channel algorithm switches.
Handover Algorithm Switch
This describes the handover algorithm switches.
Power Control Algorithm Switches
This describes the power control switches.
HSPA Algorithm Switch
This describes the HSPA algorithm switches.
DRD Algorithm Switches
This describes the DRD algorithm switches.
SRNS Relocation Algorithm Switch
This describes the SRNS relocation algorithm switches.
Compressed Mode Algorithm Switch
This describes the compressed mode algorithm switches.
Parent topic: Algorithm Switches

Channel Class Algorithm Switches
7/18/2011
Page 172 of 205
This describes the channel algorithm switches.

ID
ChSwitch
Meaning
CAUTION:
The DCCC algorithm is a basic function. If the DCCC algorithm is disabled, channels cannot implement the following D2D adjustments that are caused by
other algorithms:
D2D rate adjustment of the BE service triggered on the basis of traffic

1A rate decreasing, that is, the rate decreasing before soft handovers
Rate decreasing due to the IUB bandwidth limit
Rate decreasing due to the TCP limit, that is, the rate decreasing for the link stability
BE service bandwidth adjustment that is triggered by the primary congestion
Table 1 shows channel algorithm switches.

Table 1 List of channel algorithm switches
Serial Algorithm Switch
No.
Switch Name
Default
Description
Configuration
AMR_TWO_CODCH_SWITCH
Switch of
configuring
two DCHs for
AMR
OFF
AMR_SID_MUST_CFG_SWITCH
Switch of
OFF
configuring
the SID frame
for AMR
When the switch is enabled, the SID frame for

AMR-NB voice call will be configured anyway.
Otherwise, the SID frame will be configured
acorrding to the CN assignment.
AMRC_SWITCH
AMRC
algorithm
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the AMRC (AMR

Control) license is activated, the AMR control
function is applied to the AMR service.
AQM_SWITCH
AQM
algorithm
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the AQM algorithm is

applied to the RNC.
BE_RATE_DOWN_BF_HO_SWITCH
Algorithm
OFF
switch for rate
decreasing
before
handovers
When the switch is enabled, the bandwidth of the

BE services is decreased before handover happens.
It is recommended to enable DCCC_SWITCH
when using this function.
DCCC_SWITCH
DCCC
algorithm
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the dynamic channel

reconfiguration control algorithm is applied to the
RNC.
DL_INNER_LOOP_POWER_CTRL_SWITCH
Downlink
inner loop
power control
activation
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the inner loop

downlink power control status is set to Active.
When the switch is disabled, the inner loop
downlink power control status is set to Inactive.
DOWNLINK_BLIND_DETECTION_SWITCH
Downlink
ON
blind detection
switch
When the switch is enabled, the downlink blind

transport format detection function is used for
single SRB and AMR + SRB bearers.
When the switch is enabled, two CoDCHs are

allocated for the AMR voice call with the bit rate of
7.95 kbit/s or less. When the switch is disabled,
three CoDCHs are allocated for the AMR voice
call.
NOTE:
The UE is only required to support the blind
transport format that is the prescribed in section
4.3.1 of the 3GPP 25.212 protocol.
9
FRC_FP_MODE_SWITCH
FP mode
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the FP mode on the Iub

interface is set to normal mode. When the switch is
disabled, the FP mode on the Iub interface is set to
silent mode.
10
FRC_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH
PDCP IP
header
compression
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the PDCP IP

header compression license is activated, the PDCP
IP header compression algorithm will be applied to
the RNC.
11
FRC_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH
PDCP RO
header
compression
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the PDCP RO

header compression license is activated, the PDCP
RO header compression algorithm will be applied
to the RNC.
7/18/2011
Page 173 of 205
12
HANDOVER_TO_UTRAN_DEFAULT_CONFIG_SWITCH Default
configuration
switch for
inter-RAT
handover to
UTRAN
ON
When the switch is enabled, the default

configurations of signaling and RABs which are
defined in 3GPP 25.331 are used when the UE
performs handovers from the GSM system to the
WCDMA system. When the switch is disabled,
those default configurations are not applied, but the
RB, TrCH and PhyCH included in the
HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMMAND message
are used instead.
13
IGNORE_RLC_CAP_SWITCH
Algorithm
switch of
ignoring the
RLC
capability of
UE
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RAB Assignment

request and the subsequent RB Setup should be
continued if the RLC AM capability of UE cannot
meet the minimum RLC buffer requirement
defined by the RLC TX/RX WINDOW LIMITs of
the RAB to be setup. When the switch is disabled,
the RAB setup request should be rejected.
14
IMS_PROC_AS_NORMAL_PS_SWITCH
IMS processed OFF

as a normal
PS RAB
switch
When the switch is enablede, the IMS signalling

RAB CN assigned will be processed as a normal PS
RAB. Otherwise no special action will be taken.
15
IMS_SUPPORT_ACTIVATION
IMS support
activation
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled and the IMS license is

activated, the RNC supports IMS.
16
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
Iu QoS
negotiation
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the Iu QoS negotiation

function is applied to the PS domain if alternative
RAB parameters are present in the RANAP RAB
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or RELOCATION
REQUEST message.
17
IU_QOS_RENEG_SWITCH
Iu QoS renegotiation
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the IU QOS

RENEQ license is activated, the RNC supports the
maximum rate re-negotiation if the QoS of realtime traffic can not be guaranteed according to cell
conditions.
18
IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH
Iub
overbooking
switch
OFF
When the wireless environment is poor, some TFs

are banned for high speed RAB to limit the speed
and then reduce the transmission power. When the
switch is enabled, the IUB overbooking function is
applied to the SRNC.
The data services are unstable to a certain degree,
for example, some traffic is caused by downloading
a webpage while no traffic is caused when users are
reading the webpage, so the actual service rate is
much different from the channel rate and there is a
big peak-to-average ratio.
If data services and voice services use the same path
for transmission, a full-rate bandwidth must be
reserved for the data services so that the voice
services are not affected when the data services are
implemented in peak rate. The Iub interface has
insufficient transmission resources and each data
service needs much bandwidth, so a rather limited
amount of data can be connected at the same time,
and thus it is difficult to carry out a mass of data
services.
More data services can be implemented if data
services use an independent path for transmission,
differentiated transmission methods are used, and
smaller activated factors are configured. In this
way, only data services are affected even when
congestion is caused by simulatneous data
transmission of multiple data connections.
19
IUUP_V2_SPT_SWITCH
IUUp V2 SPT
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the Support IUUP

Version 2 license is enabled, the RNC supports the
TFO/TRFO function.
20
LOSSLESS_RELOCIN_SWITCH
Lossless
relocation
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the UE supports

lossless relocation, PDCP is configured to
supporting the lossless relocation if the RNC meets
conditions such as the RLC mode, desertion mode,
and in-sequence submission.
21
LOSSLESS_DLRLC_PDUSIZECHG_SWITCH
Lossless
OFF
downlink RLC
PDU size
When the switch is enabled, the size of downlink

RLC PDU can change lossless.
7/18/2011
Page 174 of 205
change
algorithm
switch
21
MULTI_RAB_SWITCH
Switch of
single domain
supporting
multiple
services
ON
When the switch is enabled, multi-RABs

combination of 2CS, 2CS+1PS, 1CS+2PS and 2PS
are supported in the RNC.
22
PDCP_IPV6_HEAD_COMPRESS_SWITCH
IPv6 packet
header
compression
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled and the PDCP header

compression license is activated, the PDCP header
compression algorithm for IPv6 will be applied to
the RNC.
23
PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
UE state
transition
switch for PS
BE service
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UE RRC state

transitions
(CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) for
services are applied to the RNC.
24
PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
UE State
Transition
switch for PS
Non-BE
service
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UE RRC state

transitions to CELL_FACH for real-time services
are applied to the RNC.
25
RAB
downsizing
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RAB downsizing

function is activated to determine the initial bit rate
according to cell resources.
26
RSC_FEEDBK_AFTER_SETUPRAB_FAIL_SWITCH
RSC feedback OFF

after setup
RAB failure
switch
When the switch is enabled, the cell left SF is

brought back if the RAB setup fails because of the
lack of CELL SF and then the RAB setup tries
again with a lower speed to fit the feedback SF.
27
SYSHOIN_CMP_IUUP_FIXTO1_SWITCH
SysHoIn
complete
configure
IUUP version
back switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, IUUP Version can

back to R99 when SysHoIn use complete configure.
28
THROU_DCCC_SWITCH
DCCC switch
based on
throughput
OFF
When the switch is enabled, DCCC is applied to

DCH based on throughput statistic.
Parent topic: Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in the RNC

Handover Algorithm Switch

This describes the handover algorithm switches.
ID
HoSwitch
Meaning
Table 1 List of handover algorithm switches
No.
Switch Name
Default
Configuration
1J_MEAS_SWTICH
1J measurement OFF
control switch
When the switch is enabled and the UE version is

R6, 1J event will be carried with intra-frequency
measurement control.
6F6G_SWITCH
6F6G
measurement
control switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the RNC starts the

6F6G measurement if the UE is in a macrodiversity, that is, the UE triggers the radio link
synchronization parameters measurement if the
UE has more than two links in the active set. If the
timing difference between radio links exceeds a
certain threshold, the UE reports the 6F event and
triggers a timer. If the timing difference between
the radio links is below the threshold, the UE
reports the 6G event, or the UE will release one or
more radio links when the timer expires.
ACT_SET_QUAL_SWITCH
Active set
quality
measurement
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the active set quality

measurement is allowed. After the RB setup is
complete (or after the RRC setup is complete if
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is ON), the RNC initiates
signal quality measurement to all the cells in the
Description
7/18/2011
Page 175 of 205
active set. If the integrated signal quality of all the

cells in the active set is below a certain threshold,
the UE reports the 2D event. Then according to
the status of the inter-frequency and inter-RAT
handover switch and UE capability, the RNC will
initiate the compressed mode and send interfrequency measurement control or inter-RAT
measurement control to trigger inter-frequency or
inter-RAT handovers based on the coverage.
4
DETSET_ADD_TO_ACTSET_SWITCH
Detected set add OFF (ON

When the switch is enabled, the cells in detected
to active set
recommended) set can be added to the active set when the RNC
switch
receives the valid event reports from the cells. The
cells in the detected set allowed to be added to the
active set must be the neighboring intra-frequency
cells of a cell in the active set.
DETSET_ RPRT_SWITCH
Detected set
report switch
OFF (ON
When the switch is enabled, the detected cell is
recommended) allowed to send the intra-frequency measurement
report to the RNC.
HCS_SPD_EST_SWITCH
HCS speed
estimation
switch
OFF
INTRA_FREQUENCY_HARD_HANDOVER_SWITCH
Intra-frequency ON
hard handover
switch
When the switch is enabled, the RNC evaluates

the UE's moving speed when it is in an HCS cell,
and initiates inter-layer handover by fast-mobility
decision or by fast-mobility decision according to
the UE's speed.
When the switch is enabled, the intra-frequency
hard handover is allowed under the following
conditions:
The BE service is set up on the DCH and the

bit rate of BE service or combined services
exceeds the threshold for soft handover
downlink bit rate.
The UE reports the 1D event when the soft
handover switch is off.
The UE performs inter-RNC handovers
when there is no Iur interface between the
RNCs.
INTER_FREQ_HHO_SWITCH
Inter-frequency OFF
hard handover
switch
When the switch is enabled, the inter-frequency

measurement is allowed or the inter-frequency
hard handover based on cell load is allowed.
INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH
Inter-RAT
handover out
switch for CS
service
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RNC is allowed to

initiate inter-RAT measurement to trigger interRAT handovers of the CS domain from the
UTRAN.
10
INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH
Inter-RAT
handover out
switch for PS
service
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RNC is allowed to

initiate inter-RAT measurement to trigger interRAT handovers of the PS domain from the
UTRAN.
11
IUR_SHO_DIVCTRL_FIELD_SUPP_SWITCH
Inter-Iur softOFF
handover
macro-diversity
support switch
When the switch is enabled, the Iur diversity

support switch is configured according to the
diversity switch of this RNC. When the switch is
disabled, the Iur diversity support switch is set to
MUST (for BE service) or MAY (for other
services) according to the service type.
12
NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH
Neighboring cell OFF

combining
switch
When the switch is enabled, the measurement

object is chosen from neighboring cells of all the
cells in the active set and limited by 32. When the
switch is disabled, the measurement object is
chosen from neighboring cells and the best cell
and limited by 32.
13
PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH
PS 3G->2G cell
change NACC
switch
When the switch is enabled, the Network Assisted

Cell Change (NACC) function is supported in the
3G -> 2G inter-RAT handover support process for
the PS domain. When
PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH is ON, the
PS 3G->2G cell change NACC switch is not
invalid.
OFF
NACC: Network Assisted Cell Change. The

NACC is used to access the 2G cell according to
the SI/PSI of the target cell to reduce the delay of
inter-cell handovers.
14
PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH
PS 3G->2G
reallocation
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, inter-RAT

handovers of the PS domain from UTRAN
use the relocation method.
7/18/2011
15
SERVICE_HO_BASED_ON_RNC_SWITCH
Page 176 of 205
Service
OFF
handover based
on the RNC
settings
When the switch is disabled, inter-RAT

handovers of the PS domain from UTRAN
use the cell change order method.
When the switch is enabled, the service

attribute of inter-RAT handovers is
configured according to the RNC
parameters.
When the switch is disabled, the service
attribute of inter-RAT handovers is
configured based on the CN if the CN has
the service handover attribute, and is
configured based on the RNC if the CN has
not the service handover attribute.
16
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH
Signaling
OFF
handover switch
When the switch is enabled, the RNC initiates the

quality measurement of active set after the RRC
setup is complete (before RB setup). In this way,
the RNC can trigger inter-frequency or inter-RAT
handover when the RRC setup is complete. Thus
the UE can be handed over to an inter-frequency
or inter-RAT neighboring cell more quickly when
the UE is located at the edge of the cell or the
signal quality of the radio link is bad.
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is not used to trigger
inter-frequency or inter-RAT handovers only
when the UE has signal connection. It is used to
start the active set quality measurement process
once the RRC connection is set up and the RB is
not setup. If the active set quality measurement
result has been sent, SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH
affects nothing.
17
SIGNAL_IUR_INTRA_HO_SWITCH
Signaling intra- OFF

frequency
handover
control over Iur
When the switch is enabled, the intra-frequency

handover over IUR is allowed if the UE has only
signal connection.
18
SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH
SNA restriction
switch
When the switch is enabled, the RNC controls the

UEs that are active in the CN configuration. Those
UEs are allowed to access and move only in the
cells with permission.
OFF
The SNA restriction needs to be supported by the

CN.
19
SOFT_HANDOVER_SWITCH
Soft handover
switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the soft or softer

handover is allowed in the cells of the RNC. When
receiving an event 1A, 1B, 1C, or 1D report, the
RNC starts to add, remove or replace soft
handover cells.
20
HO_BEYOND_UE_CAP_ADD_TO_MC_SWITCH
Neighbor cell
beyond UE
capability
measurement
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, then the neighboring

cells whose frequency band is not included in the
UE's measurement capability will also be sent in
the inter-frequency measurement list.
21
LDR_HO_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH
Soft handover
OFF
state trigger
LDR interfrequency
handover switch
When the switch is enabled, the LDR interfrequency handover is allowed in the soft
handover state.
22
MBMS_FLC_SWITCH
MBMS
frequency layer
convergence
swtich
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the MBMS frequency

layer convergence adopts redirection strategy.
23
OVERLAY_SWITCH
Overlay
network switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the special functions

for overlay network are valid. Otherwise, they are
forbidden.
24
SERV_CELL_CHG_WITH_ACTSET_UPDATE_SWITCH Service cell

change and
active set
update in one
step switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, active set update

procedure and service cell change procedure can
be finished in one step. The switch is only fit for
the UE with version R6.
25
SERV_CELL_CHG_WITH_CHL_SWITCH
OFF
When the switch is enabled, channel

reconfiguration procedure and service cell change
procedure can be finished in one step.
Service cell
change and
channel
reconfiguration
in one step
7/18/2011
Page 177 of 205
switch
Power Control Algorithm Switches

This describes the power control switches.
ID
PcSwitch
Switch Meaning
Table 1 List of power control switches
No.
Switch Name
Default
Description
Configuration
AMR_MODE_INDUCE_BLER_TARGET_ALTER_SWITCH Altering switch of

target BLER value
induced by AMR
mode
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the BLER

target value comes from the BLER target
value of the AMR modes specified in the
AMRC parameter table. When the switch
is disabled, the BLER target value comes
from the BLER target value specified in
TYPRAB.
DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH
Downlink power
balance switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the DPB

(Downlink Power Balance) algorithm is
applied to the RNC. Downlink power
drift among different RLs may be caused
by TPC bit error in the soft handover
process. The downlink power balance can
solve the power unbalance between RLs
to reach the otpimal gain of soft
handovers.
FP_MUTI_RLS_IND_SWITCH
Multi RLS indicator

switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RNC will

inform NodeB about the change of RLS's
number with FP inner band signaling.
INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH
Limited power
increase in the inner
loop power control
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the limited

power increase algorithm is applied in the
inner loop power control.
OLPC_SWITCH
Outer loop power

control switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the RNC

updates the uplink SIR TARGET of RLS
on the NodeB side by IUB DCH FP
signals.
OLPC_UL_SIR_ERR_REL_SWITCH
UE released linked to
UL SIR error switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UE is

released if the SIRERR is high and the
cell is overloaded.
RL_RECFG_SIR_TARGET_CARRY_SWITCH
SIRTarget switch for

RL reconfiguration
ON
When the switch is disabled, the current

converged outer loop SIR Target should
be taken into consideration in the new
initial SIR Target during the RL
reconfiguration, and the UL SIR Target
is not included in the RL reconfiguration
message to the NodeB. The switch is valid
only when OLPC_SWITCH is on.
SIG_DCH_OLPC_SWITCH
Switch of the
OFF
signaling transmission
participating in the
outer loop power
control for multiple
DCHs
This switch is used to determine whether

SIG DCH joins the uplink OLPC (outside
loop power control) procedure if there
are multiple DCHs. When the switch is
enabled, SIG DCH joins OLPC
procedure. But when there is SIG DCH,
SIG DCH joins OLPC procedure no
matter whether this switch is enabled or
not.

HSPA Algorithm Switch

This describes the HSPA algorithm switches.
7/18/2011
Page 178 of 205
ID
HspaSwitch
Switch Meaning
Table 1 List of HSPA algorithm switches
No.
Switch Name Default

Description
Configuration
HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
HSDPA
service state
transition
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UE RRC state transitions to

CELL_FACH for the HSDPA services are applied to the
RNC. $ When the RAB on the HS-DSCH is the BE service,
the PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH needs to be enabled
simultaneously. $ When the RAB on the HS-DSCH is the PS
real-time service, the
PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH needs to be enabled
simultaneously.
PS_STREAMING_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH
Streaming
service on
HSDPA
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the PS streaming service can be

mapped to the HS-DSCH if the maximum downlink bit rate is
higher than or equal to the threshold for the PS streaming
service to be set up on the HSDPA.
HSDPA_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH
HSDPA flow
control
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the HSDPA (AM mode) flow

control function is applied to the SRNC.
HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
HSUPA state OFF

transition
switch
When the switch is enabled, UE RRC state transitions to

CELL_FACH for the DCCC algorithm of HSUPA services
are allowed in the RNC.
HSUPA_PO_UPDATE_SWITCH
HSUPA PO
update
switch
OFF
When the HSUPA PO update switch and OLPC algorithm

switch is enabled, the RNC adjusts the E-DCH power offset
periodically.
PS_STREAMING_ON_E_DCH_SWITCH
PS streaming OFF
on E-DCH
switch
When the switch is enabled, the PS streaming traffic can be

mapped to the E-DCH if the maximum uplink bit rate is
higher than or equal to the threshold for the PS streaming
service to be set up on HSUPA.
H2D_FOR_LOWR5_NRNCCELL_ADD_SWITCH H2D before

an NRNC
cell whose
version is
earlier than
R5 is added
OFF
When the switch is enabled, channel switch of HS-DSCH to

DCH is needed before an NRNC whose version is earlier than
R5 is added to the active set.
HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH
2 ms TTI
switch for
HSUPA
service
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the 2ms TTI could be applied to

HSUPA traffic.
HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH
DCCC
switch for
HSUPA
service
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the dynamic channel

reconfiguration control algorithm is applied to the HSUPA
service.

DRD Algorithm Switches

This describes the DRD algorithm switches.
ID
DrdSwitch
Meaning
Table 1 DRD algorithm switches
Serial
No.
Algorithm Switch
Switch Name
Default
Configuration
Description
COMB_SERV_DRD_SWITCH
Integrated service
DRD switch
OFF
When this switch is enabled, DRD can be performed only if the

integrated service needs retry.
DRD_SWITCH
DRD switch
OFF
This is the general DRD algorithm switch. Other DRD sub-switches

can be enabled only when this switch is enabled.
HSDPA_DRD_SWITCH
HSDPA DRD switch OFF
When the switch is enabled, the DRD can be performed only if the
HSDPA service needs retry.
7/18/2011
Page 179 of 205
RAB_DCCC_DRD_SWITCH
DCCC DRD switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the DRD can be done only if the RAB
DCCC process needs retry.
RAB_MODIFY_DRD_SWITCH
RAB modify DRD

switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the DRD can be performed only if the
RAB modify process needs retry.
HSUPA_DRD_SWITCH
HSUPA DRD switch OFF
When the switch is enabled, the DRD can be done only if the
HSUPA service needs retry.
RAB_SETUP_DRD_SWITCH
RAB setup DRD

switch
ON
When the switch is enabled, the DRD can be done only if the RAB
setup process needs retry.
INTRA_HO_D2H_DRD_SWITCH Intra-frequency
ON
handover D2H DRD
switch
When the UE needs D2H retry for handover-triggering after the

intra-frequency handover process is completed, the blind-Ho DRD
cell can be selected for D2H retry only if the switch is on.
INTER_HO_D2H_DRD_SWITCH Inter-frequency
ON
handover D2H DRD
switch
When the UE needs D2H retry for handover-triggering after the

inter-frequency handover process is completed, the blind-Ho DRD
cell can be selected for D2H retry only if the switch is on.

SRNS Relocation Algorithm Switch

This describes the SRNS relocation algorithm switches.
ID
SrnsrSwitch
Meaning
Table 1 List of SRNS relocation algorithm switches
Serial
No.
Algorithm Switch
Switch Name
Default
Configuration
Description
SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH
SRNS relocation or
DSCR switch for Iur
resource optimization
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the RNC initiates SRNS

relocation or DSCR of certain UEs under the following
conditions to optimize resources over the Iur interface:
The UE only has connections with cells in the

DRNC.
The Iur transmission resources are congested.
The service of UE is the same as the service that is
carried by the congestion link.
The RNC selects the relocation or the DSCR process

according to the setting of DSCRInd in ADD NRNC.
2
SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH
SRNS relocation or
DSCR switch for
separated location
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the RNC triggers RNS

relocation or DSCR when the SRNC and CRNC are
separated and all the intra-frequency neighboring cells
and the best cell are not under the SRNC.
SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH SRNS relocation or

OFF
DSCR switch for delay
optimization
When the switch is enabled, the RNC initiates SRNS

relocation under the following conditions to reduce link
delay at the network side to enhance service quality:
The SRNC and CRNC are separated.

The link delay does not meet the Qos requirement
for the current service.

4
SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH
SRNS relocation or
DSCR switch for
separated duration
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the RNC triggers RNS

relocation or DSCR when the separated time between the
SRNC and the CRNC exceeds a certain threshold.

Compressed Mode Algorithm Switch
7/18/2011
Page 180 of 205
This describes the compressed mode algorithm switches.

ID
CmcfSwitch
Meaning
Table 1 List of compressed mode algorithm switches
No.
Switch Name
Default
Configuration
Description
CMCF_DL_HLS_SWITCH
Compressed mode
DL higher-layer
scheduling switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the DL higher-layer

scheduling for compressed mode is allowed.
CMCF_UL_HLS_SWITCH
Compressed mode
UL higher-layer
scheduling switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the UL higher-layer

scheduling for compressed mode is allowed.
CMCF_UL_PRECFG_TOLERANCE_SWITCH
Compressed mode
UL preconfigured
state tolerance
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the disaccord between

compressed mode method and current traffic is
allowed.
CMCF_WITHOUT_UE_CAP_REPORT_SWITCH Compressed mode

without UE
capability report
switch
OFF
When the switch is enabled, the RNC needs to start

the compressed mode and deliver the measurement,
if the UE does not report the compressed mode
capability of the corresponding frequency band after
the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement is
started.

Cell Algorithm Switches

This describes the cell algorithm switches, which are valid for single cells. Different cells can have different algorithm configurations. The algorithm
switches become effective as soon as they are configured.
On the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADD CELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried
through LST CELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MOD CELLALGOSWITCH.
Cell Class Algorithm Switches

This describes the cell algorithm switches.
Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch
This describes the switch that is used to control the UL CAC algorithm.
Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch
This describes the switch that is used to control the DL CAC algorithm.

Cell Class Algorithm Switches

This describes the cell algorithm switches.
Table 1 List of cell algorithm switches
Algorithm Switch
Switch Name
Description
Cell CAC algorithm switch: NBMCACALGOSWITCH

CRD_ADCTRL
NodeB credit
admission
control
algorithm
ON
The switch is used to determine whether the

preliminary admission needs to be performed for the
credit of the intelligent-admission NodeB and whether
the credit admission control algorithm is started for
the cell. The NodeB credit admission control
algorithm is valid only when
NODEB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH in the SET
CACALGOSWITCH command is enabled and
CRD_ADCTRL is enabled.
IUBBAND_ADCTRL
Iub bandwidth
admission
control
OFF
Only when IUB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH in the

command SET CACALGOSWITCH is enabled and
this switch is also enabled, the Iub bandwidth
admission control algorithm is valid.
HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL
HSDPA UU
OFF
Load admission
The switch is used to determine whether the HSDPA

UU Load admission control algorithm is started.
7/18/2011
Page 181 of 205
control
HSDPA_GBP_MEAS
HSDPA GBP
measurement
OFF

HS-DSCH required power measurement is started.
HSDPA_PBR_MEAS
HSDPA PBR
measurement
OFF

HS-DSCH provided bit rate measurement is started.
HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL
HSUPA UU
OFF
Load admission
control
The switch is used to determine whether the HSUPA

MBMS_UU_ADCTRL
MBMS UU
OFF
Load admission
control
The switch is used to determine whether the MBMS

HSUPA_PBR_MEAS
HSUPA PBR
measurement
OFF
The switch is used to determine whether the HSUPA

guaranteed bit rate measurement is started.
DOFFC
Default DPCH
offset
configuration
algorithm
ON
When the switch is enabled, the DOFF is configured

with intervals according to the load. When the switch
is disabled, the DOFF is configured randomly.
Cell LDC algorithm switch: NBMLDCALGOSWITCH

INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB
Intra-frequency OFF
load balance
algorithm
It is also named cell breathing algorithm. Based on

the cell load, this algorithm changes the pilot power of
the cell to control the load between intra-frequency
cells.
PUC
Potential user
control
algorithm
OFF
Based on the cell load, this algorithm changes the

selection/reselection parameters of a cell to lead the
UE to a lighter loaded cell.
UL_UU_OLC
Uplink
overload
control
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is overloaded in UL, this algorithm

reduces the cell load in UL by quick TF restriction or
UE release.
DL_UU_OLC
Downlink
overload
control
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is overloaded in DL, this algorithm

reduces the cell load in DL by quick TF restriction or
UE release.
UL_UU_LDR
Uplink load
rearrangement
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in UL, this algorithm

reduces the cell load in UL by using inter-frequency
load handover, BE service rate reduction,
uncontrollable real-time service QoS renegotiation,
CS inter-RAT handover, and PS inter-RAT handover.
DL_UU_LDR
Downlink load
rearrangement
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, this algorithm

reduces the cell load in DL by using inter-frequency
load handover, BE service rate reduction,
uncontrollable real-time service QoS renegotiation,
CS inter-RAT handover, and PS inter-RAT handover.
OLC_EVENTMEAS
OLC event
measurement
OFF
The switch determines whether the load control is

triggered based on the event measurement alone or
based on the period measurement report.
CELL_CODE_LDR
Code
reshuffling
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, this algorithm

reduces the cell load in DL by using BE service rate
reduction and code tree reshuffling.
CELL_CREDIT_LDR
Credit
reshuffling
algorithm
OFF
When the cell credit is heavily loaded, this algorithm

reduces the credit load of the cell by using BE service
rate reduction, uncontrollable real-time service QoS
renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PS interRAT handover.
MAC-HS reset algorithm switch

NBMMACHSRESETALGOSELSWITCH MAC-HS reset
algorithm
switch
ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG Value range:
ALGORITHM_REQUIRED: Always reset the

MAC-HS no matter the target cell and source
cell are in the same NodeB or not.
ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG: Reset the
MAC-HS only when the target cell and source
cell are in different local cell groups.
Recommended value:
ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG
Parent topic: Cell Algorithm Switches
7/18/2011
Page 182 of 205
Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the UL CAC algorithm.
ID
NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch
Value Range
ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND, ALGORITHM_THIRD
Physical Scope
ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm
ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for the uplink admission
ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for the uplink admission
ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in the uplink CAC.
Setting
The default setting is ALGORITHM_SECOND.
When the change range of the uplink background noise is wide or the RTWP reported by the NodeB is invalid, it is necessary to use the total service
normalized factor algorithm.
Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the DL CAC algorithm.
ID
NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch
Value Range
ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND, ALGORITHM_THIRD
Physical Scope
ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the downlink admission control algorithm
ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for the downlink admission
ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for the downlink admission
ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in the downlink CAC.
Setting
The default setting is ALGORITHM_FIRST.
If TCP measurement is invalid, the total service normalized factor algorithm is adopted.
Other Algorithm Switches

This describes some other algorithm switches, such as the Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iub bandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch,
and intra-frequency measurement control information indication.
NodeB credit admission Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the NodeB credit admission control algorithm.
Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch
This describes the Iub bandwidth congestion control algorithm switch.
Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication
This describes the indication that defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control information should be delivered through the system
messages.
7/18/2011
Page 183 of 205
Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is to be delivered in the system
messages.
FACH Measurement Indication
This describes the indicator that indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period length coefficient is to be delivered in the system message.
If the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is delivered in the system message, some UE needs to be configured with the
measurement occasion parameters to perform the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement when they are in the CELL-FACH state. If the interfrequency or inter-RAT measurement control information indicator is set to NOT_REQUIRE, the FACH measurement indicator needs not to be
configured.

NodeB credit admission Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch that is used to control the NodeB credit admission control algorithm.
Parameter ID
CacSwitch
Value Range
Table 1 NodeB credit admission algorithm switch
Algorithm Switch
Switch Name
NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH NodeB credit

CAC switch
Description
Related Command
The system performs the CAC based on the usage state of the NodeB
credit. When the idle NodeB's credit is not enough, the system refuses
new access requests.
Set: SET
CACALGOSWITCH
Query: LST
CACALGOSWITCH
Parent topic: Other Algorithm Switches

Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch

This describes the Iub bandwidth congestion control algorithm switch.
ID
IubCongCtrlSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
When this switch is enabled, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when the occupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub
congestion trigger threshold, the algorithm uses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupied bandwidth is
lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.
If there is insufficient transmission resource of the Iub interface and the carrier wants to have more users be admitted even at the risk of reducing the QoS,
this switch shall be ON. When the transmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.
Related Commands
Use ADD NODEBALGOPARA to set, LST NODEBALGOPARA to query, and MOD NODEBALGOPARA to modify IubCongCtrlSwitch.
Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication

This describes the indication that defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control information should be delivered through the system messages.
7/18/2011
Page 184 of 205
ID
IntraFreqMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)
Physical Scope
REQUIRE: The intra-frequency measurement control information is delivered in SIB11.
NOT_REQUIRE: The intra-frequency measurement control information is not delivered in SIB11.
Setting
The default setting is REQUIRE.
When intra-frequency measurement control information (the pre-configuration of the measurement control) is delivered in the system, so that the UE can
starts the intra-frequency measurement and sends the measurement report immediately after it enters CELL_DCH state, and the soft handover can be
more quickly finished by the UE to avoid call drops when the UE is in the soft handover area.
The preconfiguration of measurement control can enable the UE in the soft handover area to implement soft handovers more quickly to decrease the call
drop rate. With the preconfiguration function, the UEs in the single signaling state perform soft handovers in a higher probability. If the CN delivers the
RAB assignment before a soft handover is complete, the delay of UE service setup may increase.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modify IntraFreqMeasInd.
Inter-Frequency or Inter-RAT Measurement Indication

This describes the indication that indicates whether inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is to be delivered in the system
messages.
ID
InterFreqInterRatMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (NOT_REQUIRE, INTER_FREQ, INTER_RAT, INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT)
Physical Scope
NOT_REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is not required.
INTER_FREQ: The inter-frequency measurement control information is required.
INTER_RAT: The inter-RAT measurement control information is required.
INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT: The inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement control information is required.
Setting
The default setting is INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT, that is, the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator
are set to TRUE in the system message. This switch is oriented to cells.
When a UE in the CELL_FACH state receives the FACH measurement occasion info message and in the message the inter-frequency FDD measurement
indicator is set to TRUE, the UE performs inter-frequency measurement and cell reselection assessment according to the inter-frequency neighboring cell
list in the SIB11 or SIB12. If in the preceding condition, the inter-RAT measurement indicator is set to TRUE, the UE performs inter-frequency
measurement and cell reselection assessment according to the inter-RAT neighboring cell list in the SIB11 or SIB12. If the inter-frequency FDD
measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator are set to FALSE in the system message, the UE does not start corresponding measurement
and cell reselection.
NOTE:
If the inter-frequency FDD measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicator are set to TRUE but no inter-frequency or inter-RAT
neighboring cell is configured, the UE does not perform the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement and cell reselection.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 185 of 205
Use ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modify InterFreqInterRatMeasInd.
FACH Measurement Indication

This describes the indicator that indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period length coefficient is to be delivered in the system message. If the
inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is delivered in the system message, some UE needs to be configured with the measurement
occasion parameters to perform the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement when they are in the CELL-FACH state. If the inter-frequency or interRAT measurement control information indicator is set to NOT_REQUIRE, the FACH measurement indicator needs not to be configured.
ID
FACHMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)
Physical Scope
REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter is delivered in SBI11.
NOT_REQUIRE: The inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion parameter is not delivered in SIB11.
Setting
If the inter-freq or inter-RAT measurement control information is delivered in the system message (SIB11 or SIB12), UEs in the CELL_FACH state can
perform inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell measurement and reselection only when the CN delivers the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement occasion
parameter in SIB11 or SIB12.
When there is no inter-frequency or inter-RAT cell, the FACH measurement indicator needs not to be configured. To have the UE perform inter-frequency
or inter-RAT cell reselection, the FACH measurement indicator needs to be configured.
Related Commands
Use ADD CELLMEAS to set, LST CELLMEAS to query, and MOD CELLMEAS to modify FACHMeasInd.
Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT

This describes the parameters that can be configured on the NodeB LMT: the HSDPA flow control parameters, HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm
parameters, HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power control parameters, and local cell management parameters.
HSDPA Flow Control Parameters

This describes the HSDPA flow control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters
This describes the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters
This describes the HSDPA SPI algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
This describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners on the NodeB LMT.
HSUPA Power Control Parameters
This describes the HSUPA power control parameters: the power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel, fixed power control mode
algorithm parameters, and dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters.
Local Cell Management Parameters
This describes the local cell management parameters: cell radius and cell handover radius.

HSDPA Flow Control Parameters

This describes the HSDPA flow control parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
7/18/2011
SWITCH Flow Control Switch
AUTO_ADJUST_
FLOW_CTRL
DR
Frame discard rate threshold on the

Iub interface
0.1%
TD
Delay trigger threshold
2 (10 ms)
Page 186 of 205
Set: SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,

BBU3836)
Query: LST HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836,
BTS3836A, BBU3836)
HSDPA Flow Control Switch

This describes the switch of dynamic adjustment of the HSDPA bandwidth. The switch determines whether the congestion is controlled by the RNC or
NodeB.
Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface
This describes the frame discard rate threshold on the Iub interface. The frame discard rate on the Iub interface is the frame discard rate of the
transmission network on the Iub interface, namely the packet loss rate caused by errors when the transmission network is in the idle state. Only if the
frame discard rate measured by the reception end exceeds the threshold, the system judges that the Iub interface has congestion.
Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface
This describes the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less busy. The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay
measured at the NodeB exceeds the threshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other than congestion.
Parent topic: Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT

HSDPA Flow Control Switch

This describes the switch of dynamic adjustment of the HSDPA bandwidth. The switch determines whether the congestion is controlled by the RNC or
NodeB.
ID
SWITCH
Value Range
SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL, NO_FLOW_CTRL
Physical Scope
SIMPLE_FLOW_CTR: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by R99 subscribers, the traffic is allocated to HSDPA
subscribers when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken into account.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRLNode: Based on the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and
packet loss on the Iub interface are taken into account.
NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth
according to the bandwidth on the Uu interface reported by the NodeB.
Setting
This parameter should be configured according to the scenarios, and is set to AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL by default.
This parameter helps implement the end-to-end congestion control when HSDPA data is transmitted on the Iub interface. In this way, the Iub bandwidth
utilization rate is promoted and the transmission reliability is enhanced. The switch is enabled by default.
Related Commands
Use SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to
query SWITCH.
Parent topic: HSDPA Flow Control Parameters
Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface

This describes the frame discard rate threshold on the Iub interface. The frame discard rate on the Iub interface is the frame discard rate of the
transmission network on the Iub interface, namely the packet loss rate caused by errors when the transmission network is in the idle state. Only if the frame
discard rate measured by the reception end exceeds the threshold, the system judges that the Iub interface has congestion.
ID
DR
Value Range
0 to 1000
7/18/2011
Page 187 of 205
Physical Scope
0 to 1, with the step of 0.001
Setting
The default value is 1, namely 0.1% when the Iub interface uses the ATM topology.
When the Iub interface uses IP networking, it is set to the discard target of the IP transmission network.
If DR is excessively low, the dynamic adjustment algorithm may judge that there is a congestionthe when frames are discarded due to the network
code errors, thus decreasing the bandwidth utilization rate.
If DR is excessively high, the sensitivity to clear Iub congestion decreases.
Related Commands
query DR.
Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface

This describes the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less busy. The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured
at the NodeB exceeds the threshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other than congestion.
ID
TD
Value Range
0 to 20
Physical Scope
0 ms to 100 ms, with the step of 5 ms
Setting
The parameter setting consists of two parts: the time delay of Iub transport network + 10 ms
Time delay of the Iub transport network

The time delay of the Iub transport network refers to the transmission delay period while data is transmitted on HS-DSCH and it consists of the delay
of data buffering in each processing unit and the delay of transmission through the network. The time delay of ATM transmission network differs
from that of the IP transmission network. It is recommended to send data frames when the network is less busy, and get the transmission delay
differences among labeled samples at the NodeB receiver. (The NodeB with enhanced performance can get the time delay of data frame transmission.)
But there is no test result at present, and it is arranged for the time being as follows:
For the Iub interface with ATM networking: 0 ms
For Iub interface with IP networking: the time delay target of IP transport network
10 ms:
According to HS-DSCH INTERVAL (10 ms to 80 ms), when a data frame is transmitted in a network not congested, the transmission delay may be up
to 80 ms, but we take the minimum value 10 ms as a benchmark.
If TD is excessively low, the system may judges that there is Iub-interface congestion when the regular time delay jitter of the Iub interface happens,
reducing the Iub bandwidth utilization rate.
If TD is excessively high, the sensitivity to clear the congestion decreases, and the Iub transmission delay increases.
Related Commands
query TD.
7/18/2011
Page 188 of 205
HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters

This describes the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
SM
Scheduling method
EPF
Set:
RSCALLOCM
Resource allocate method, CODE_PRI : code priority (applied to the powerlimited macro cells); POWER_PRI : power priority (applied to the code-limited
micro cells)
SCCHPWRCM
HS-SCCH power control method
CQI
SCCHPWR
When the HS-SCCH power is controlled by fixed configuration, SCCHPWR is the

fixed power value of HS-SCCH; when the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power
control based on CQI, SCCHPWR is the HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The
value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power of PCPICH.
28, namely
3dB
SET MACHSPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
Query:
LST MACHSPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
RSCLMSW
Resource limiting switch
OPEN
DYNCODESW
HSDPA dynamic code switch controlled by the NodeB
OPEN
MXPWRPHUSR Maximum transmit power of per HSDPA user.
100%
8KRSCLMT
10%
Set:
16KRSCLMT
10%
32KRSCLMT
15%
SET RSCLMTPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
64KRSCLMT
15%
Query:
128KRSCLMT
20%
256KRSCLMT
25%
LST RSCLMTPARA
(BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836)
384KRSCLMT
30%
Resource limiting for different GBR
Scheduling Method
This describes the scheduling method.
Resource Allocation Method
This describes the resource allocation method.
HS-SCCH Power Control Method
This describes the power control method of the HS-SCCH.
HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power
This describes the HS-SCCH fixed power or initial transmit power. When the HS-SCCH power is controlled by the fixedly configured method, this
parameter is the HS-SCCH fixed power. When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on the CQI, this parameter is the HS-SCCH
initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power of PCPICH.
Resource Limiting Switch
This describes the resource limiting switch. The parameter decides whether to restrain a single subscriber's maximum resource usage in a congested
cell.
HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation Switch
This describes the switch that indicates whether the HSDPA dynamic code allocation algorithm is enabled.
Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user.
This describes the maximum transmit power for per HSDPA user.
The parameters specify the maximum resource ratio available for different GBR.

Scheduling Method
This describes the scheduling method.
ID
SM
Value Range
EPF, PF, RR, MAXCI
Physical Scope
None.
7/18/2011
Page 189 of 205
Setting
The default value is EPF.
RR : The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequenced according to the RR values.
MAX CI: The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequenced according to the MAXCI values.
PF: The service types of queues are not considered. All the queues in a cell are sequenced according to the PF values.
EPF: The types of queues are considered.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SM.
Parent topic: HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters
Resource Allocation Method

This describes the resource allocation method.
ID
RSCALLOCM
Value Range
CODE_PRI, POWER_PRI
Physical Scope
Code priority, power priority
Setting
The default value is CODE_PRI.
If the power resource is limited, the code is preferably allocated to save power resources for other subscribers; while the code resource is limited, the power
is preferably allocated to save code resources for other subscribers.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RSCALLOCM.
HS-SCCH Power Control Method

This describes the power control method of the HS-SCCH.
ID
SCCHPWRCM
Value Range
CQI, FIXED
Physical Scope
CQI means that the adaptive power control based on CQI is used; FIXED means that the HS-SCCH power is fixed.
Setting
The default value is CQI.
7/18/2011
Page 190 of 205
The HS-SCCH power control has a significant effect on data transmission.
If excessive HS-SCCH power is allocated, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
If insufficient HS-SCCH power is allocated, the HS-PDSCH decoding error probability increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout
declines.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SCCHPWRCM.
HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power

This describes the HS-SCCH fixed power or initial transmit power. When the HS-SCCH power is controlled by the fixedly configured method, this
parameter is the HS-SCCH fixed power. When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on the CQI, this parameter is the HS-SCCH initial
transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the transmit power of PCPICH.
ID
SCCHPWR
Value Range
0 to 80
Physical Scope
Setting
When the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, SCCHPWR has the following impacts on the network performance:
If excessive HS-SCCH power is allocated, the available power of the HS-PDSCH decreases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
If insufficient HS-SCCH power is allocated, the HS-SCCH decoding error probability increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
When the HS-SCCH uses the adaptive power control based on CQI, SCCHPWR has the following impacts on the network performance:
If SCCHPWR is excessively high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control takes effect.
If SCCHPWR is excessively low, the HS-SCCH decoding error probability increases before the power control takes effect, weakening the data
transmission performance.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SCCHPWR.
Resource Limiting Switch

This describes the resource limiting switch. The parameter decides whether to restrain a single subscriber's maximum resource usage in a congested cell.
ID
RSCLMSW
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is OPEN.
7/18/2011
Page 191 of 205
If the switch is turned off, it is likely that a vast majority of the cell resources are taken up by the subscribers with high priority but poor CQI.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RSCLMSW.
HSDPA Dynamic Code Allocation Switch

This describes the switch that indicates whether the HSDPA dynamic code allocation algorithm is enabled.
ID
DYNCODESW
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE
Physical Scope
OPEN: The dynamic code allocation is enabled.
CLOSE: The dynamic code allocation is disabled.
Setting
The recommended value of DYNCODESW is OPEN.
The HSDPA dynamic code allocation makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized, but the number of allocated codes will not exceed the number
of codes defined by the HSDPA license.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query DYNCODESW.
Maximum Transmit Power of per HSDPA user.

This describes the maximum transmit power for per HSDPA user.
ID
MXPWRPHUSR
Value Range
1 to 100
Physical Scope
1% to 100%
Setting
If the parameter is set too low, the peak rate may be limited.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query MXPWRPHUSR.
7/18/2011
Page 192 of 205

The parameters specify the maximum resource ratio available for different GBR.
ID
8KRSCLMT
16KRSCLMT
32KRSCLMT
64KRSCLMT
128KRSCLMT
256KRSCLMT
384KRSCLMT
Value Range
1 to 100
Physical Scope
1% to 100%
Setting
GBR (bps)
Default value
8k
10%
16k
10%
32k
15%
64k
15%
128k
20%
256k
25%
384k
30%

The parameters are used to avoid impacting system capacity due to too much air interface resource are consumed.
Related Commands
Use SET RSCLMTPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST RSCLMTPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query the parameters.
HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters

This describes the HSDPA SPI algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of HSDPA SPI scheduling algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
SSPI
SPI initial value
ESPI
SPI end value
15
Set: SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,

BBU3836)
SPIWEIGHT
Weight of SPI
N/A
EPFSA
EPF schedule algorithm switch
DS_PQ_SCHEDULE
FCA
Flow control algorithm switch
FLOW_CONTRL_FREE
CQIADJA
CQI adjust algorithm switch
NO_CQI_ADJ
RBLERTARGET Residual BLER target
N/A
MAXRETRANS
N/A
Maximum number of retransmission

attempts
Query: LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,

BBU3836)
7/18/2011
Page 193 of 205
SPI Initial Value

This describes the initial SPI value for subscribers.
SPI End Value
This describes the end SPI value for subscribers.
Weight of SPI
This describes the weight of SPI.
EPF Schedule Algorithm Switch
This describes the EPF schedule algorithm for SPI.
Flow Control Algorithm Switch
This descries the flow control algorithm switch for SPI.
CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch
This describes the switch of CQI adjust algorithm.
Residual BLER Target Value
This describes the residual BLER target value when setting outer loop control.
Maximum Number of Retransmission Attempts
This describes the maximum of retransmission attempts in the HSDPA outer loop power control procedure.

SPI Initial Value

This describes the initial SPI value for subscribers.
ID
SSPI
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
0 to 15
Setting
The parameter is only used to set the value of parameters related to SPI algorithm.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SSPI.
Parent topic: HSDPA Based on SPI Algorithm Parameters
SPI End Value

This describes the end SPI value for subscribers.
ID
ESPI
Value Range
0 to 15
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The parameter is only used to set the value of parameters related to SPI algorithm.
Related Commands
7/18/2011
Page 194 of 205
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query ESPI.
Weight of SPI
This describes the weight of SPI.
ID
SPIWEIGHT
Value Range
1 to 100
Physical Scope
1% to 100%
Setting
Traffic Class
User Priority
THP
Default SPI
Weight of SPI
SRB signaling
No ARP
None
15
100%
IMS signaling
No ARP
None
14
100%
Conversational (VoIP)
None
13
100%
None
12
100%
11
90%
11
90%
2
3
Streaming
Interactive
Background
10
100%
100%
3 to 15
100%
90%
90%
3 to 15
90%
80%
80%
3 to 15
80%
None
100%
90%
80%

The parameter impact multi-subscribers differently.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query
SPIWEIGHT.
EPF Schedule Algorithm Switch

This describes the EPF schedule algorithm for SPI.
ID
EPFSA
7/18/2011
Page 195 of 205
Value Range
TS_SCHEDULE, DS_PQ_SCHEDULE, DS_URGENT_SCHEDULE
Physical Scope
Flow capacity sensitive queue, Time delay sensitive queue for PQ schedule, Time delay sensitive queue for urgent schedule
Setting
The default value is DS_PQ_SCHEDULE.
The parameter need be set to DS_PQ_SCHEDULE for SRB signaling and IMS signaling.
The parameter need be set to DS_URGENT_SCHEDULE for VoIP.
The parameter need be set to TS_SCHEDULE for streaming traffic and BE service.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EPFSA.
Flow Control Algorithm Switch

This descries the flow control algorithm switch for SPI.
ID
FCA
Value Range
FLOW_CONTRL_DYNAMIC, FLOW_CONTRL_FREE
Physical Scope
Dynamic flow control, Free flow control
Setting
The default value is FLOW_CONTRL_FREE.
The parameter need be set to FLOW_CONTRL_FREE for SRB signaling, IMS signaling, and such low streaming service.
The parameter need be set to FLOW_CONTRL_DYNAMIC for streaming service and BE service.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query FCA.
CQI Adjust Algorithm Switch

This describes the switch of CQI adjust algorithm.
ID
CQIADJA
Value Range
CQI_ADJ_BY_IBLER, CQI_ADJ_BY_RBLER, NO_CQI_ADJ
Physical Scope
Adjusted CQI by IBLER, Adjusted CQI by RBLER, Do not use CQI adjust algorithm.
7/18/2011
Page 196 of 205
Setting
The default value of is NO_CQI_ADJ.
It is recommended to use the default value.
Related Commands
Use SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query CQIADJA.
Residual BLER Target Value

This describes the residual BLER target value when setting outer loop control.
ID
RBLERTARGET
Value Range
1 to 50
Physical Scope
1 to 50%, with the step of 1%
Setting
None.
This parameter works only when the CQIADJA is set to CQI_ADJ_BY_RBLER.
This parameter is set according to QoS requirements. If it is set too high, the residual BLER is large. If it is set too small, that will make the air interface
transmission ratio be too small.
Related Commands
RBLERTARGET.
Maximum Number of Retransmission Attempts

This describes the maximum of retransmission attempts in the HSDPA outer loop power control procedure.
ID
MAXRETRANS
Value Range
0 to 10
Physical Scope
0 to 10 times
Setting
When the SPI is 13, The default value is 2.
For other SPI value, The default value is 4.
The parameter is set according to QoS requirements. If it's set too large, the traffic delay is too long.
7/18/2011
Page 197 of 205
For the time delay sensitive services such as VoIP, it is recommended to set the parameter to 2. For other services such as BE, it is recommended to set the
parameter to 4.
Related Commands
MAXRETRANS.

This describes the HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners on the NodeB LMT.
Table 1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
1
2
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
SCHEDULEPARA Set the MAC-e parameters or not.
YES
GBREnable
Enabled
Set: SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,

BBU3836) Query: LST MACEPARA (BTS3836,
BTS3836A, BBU3836).
If the switch is on, the scheduling algorithm ensures

the GBR rate for GBR subscribers without
considering the uplink load.
MAC-e Schedule Parameters Switch

This parameter indicates whether to set the MAC-e schedule parameters or not.
GBR Scheduling Switch
This describes the GBR scheduling switch. If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR rate needs to be affirmed during the GBR user
scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures the GBR rate for GBR users without consideration of the uplink load.

MAC-e Schedule Parameters Switch

This parameter indicates whether to set the MAC-e schedule parameters or not.
ID
SCHEDULEPARA
Value Range
NO, YES
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is YES.
The parameter should be set YES when need to change the MAC-e parameters.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RAVGINITVALUE.
GBR Scheduling Switch

This describes the GBR scheduling switch. If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR rate needs to be affirmed during the GBR user scheduling.
The scheduling algorithm ensures the GBR rate for GBR users without consideration of the uplink load.
ID
GBRENABLE
7/18/2011
Page 198 of 205
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The default value is OPEN.
If the GBR scheduling switch is set to OPEN, the RNC overload control needs to be configured as an action which can be triggered by the RTWP
measurement value.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query GBRENABLE.
HSUPA Power Control Parameters

This describes the HSUPA power control parameters: the power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel, fixed power control mode
algorithm parameters, and dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters.
Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel

This describes the HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel that can be modified by network planners.
Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters
This describes the fixed power control mode algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.

Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel

This describes the HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of power control algorithm switches for the downlink control channel
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
EAGCHPCMOD
E-AGCH HPC mode
FIXED
Cell
SERGCHPCMOD
E-RGCH HPC mode for EDCH serving

radio links
FIXED
Set: SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,

BBU3836)
NSERGCHPCMOD E-RGCH HPC mode for EDCH nonserving radio links
FIXED
SEHICHPCMOD
FIXED
NSEHICHPCMOD E-HICH HPC mode for non-serving radio FIXED

links
E-HICH HPC mode for serving radio

links
Query: LST MACHSPARA (BTS3836,

BTS3836A, BBU3836).
E-AGCH HPC Mode

This describes the E-AGCH power control algorithm switch. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CPICH power
and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links
This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to
the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links
This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set
according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of
the UE.
E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links
This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that contains serving RL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set
according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of
the UE.
E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links
This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that does not contain serving RL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit
power is set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the
DCH power of the UE.
7/18/2011
Page 199 of 205
Parent topic: HSUPA Power Control Parameters

E-AGCH HPC Mode

This describes the E-AGCH power control algorithm switch. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the P-CPICH power and
fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
ID
EAGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value of EAGCHPCMOD is FIXED.
Fixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmission power. If dynamic power control mode is used, the power
utilization is more efficient. But if the parameter is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement may not be satisfied.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EAGCHPCMOD.
Parent topic: Power Control Algorithm Switches for the Downlink Control Channel
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to the PCHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
ID
SERGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value of SERGCHPCMOD is FIXED.
Fixed power control mode can be easily implemented, but it may waste NodeB transmit power. If dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization
is more efficient. But if the parameter is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement may not be satisfied.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SERGCHPCMOD.
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set according to
the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the UE.
7/18/2011
Page 200 of 205
ID
NSERGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value of NSERGCHPCMOD is FIXED.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSERGCHPCMOD.
E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that contains serving RL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is set
according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of the
UE.
ID
SEHICHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value of SEHICHPCMOD is FIXED.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SEHICHPCMOD.
E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the HICH power control algorithm switch of the RLS that does not contain serving RL. If the switch is set to FIXED, the transmit power is
set according to the P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset. If the switch is set to DYNAMIC, the transmit power is set according to the DCH power of
the UE.
ID
NSEHICHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC
7/18/2011
Page 201 of 205
Physical Scope
None.
Setting
The HSUPA parameters have not been optimized, so the recommended value of NSEHICHPCMOD is FIXED.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSEHICHPCMOD.
Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters

This describes the fixed power control mode algorithm parameters that can be modified by network planners.
Table 1 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters
Serial
No.
ID
Meaning
Default
Configuration
MML Command
Level
EAGCHPOWER
E-AGCH power
-92, namely 9.2 dB
Set:
Cell
SERGCHPOWER
E-RGCH power for serving RLS
-200, namely 20 dB
NSERGCHPOWER E-RGCH power for non-serving RLS
163, namely 16.3

dB
SEHICHPOWER
192, namely 19.2

dB
NSEHICHPOWER E-HICH power for non-serving radio

links
E-HICH power for serving radio links
100, namely 10 dB
SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,

BBU3836)
Query:
LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A,
BBU3836).
E-AGCH Power
This parameter is the AGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
E-RGCH Power for Service Radio Links
This describes the RGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio Links
This describes the power offset of the RGCH for non-serving RLS relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
E-HICH Power for Service Radio Links
This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that contains serving radio links relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links
This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that does not contain serving radio links relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control
mode.
Parent topic: HSUPA Power Control Parameters

E-AGCH Power
This parameter is the AGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
ID
EAGCHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
The default value is 92, namely 9.2 dB.
7/18/2011
Page 202 of 205
If EAGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of AGCH channel cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.
If EAGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query EAGCHPOWER.
Parent topic: Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters
E-RGCH Power for Service Radio Links

This describes the RGCH power offset relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
ID
SERGCHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If SERGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.
If SERGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SERGCHPOWER.
E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the RGCH for non-serving RLS relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
ID
NSERGCHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If NSERGCHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.
If NSERGCHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSERGCHPOWER.
7/18/2011
Page 203 of 205
E-HICH Power for Service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that contains serving radio links relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control mode.
ID
SEHICHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If SEHICHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.
If SEHICHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query SEHICHPOWER.
E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links

This describes the power offset of the HICH in the RLS that does not contain serving radio links relative to the P-CPICH power in fixed power control
mode.
ID
NSEHICHPOWER
Value Range
350 to 150
Physical Scope
Setting
If NSEHICHPOWER is excessively low, the demodulation performance of the RGCH cannot satisfy the demodulation requirement.
If NSEHICHPOWER is excessively high, the NodeB transmit power is wasted too much.
Related Commands
Use SET MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST MACEPARA (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query NSEHICHPOWER.
Local Cell Management Parameters

This describes the local cell management parameters: cell radius and cell handover radius.
Table 1 List of local cell management parameters
Serial No.
ID
Meaning
MML Command
RADIUS
Cell radius
29 km
Set:
7/18/2011
HORAD
Cell handover radius
0m
Page 204 of 205
MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836)

Query:
LST LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836)
Cell Radius
This describes the radius of a NodeB cell. The cell radius affects the demodulation of the uplink board and the configuration of the parameters related
to the access part.
Cell Handover Radius
This describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB LMT.

Cell Radius
This describes the radius of a NodeB cell. The cell radius affects the demodulation of the uplink board and the configuration of the parameters related to the
access part.
ID
RADIUS
Value Range
150 to 180000
Physical Scope
150 m to 180 km, with the step of 1 m
Setting
The default value is 29000, namely 29 km.
You can set and adjust the cell radius based on the network planning and network optimization result. In case that the cell radius cannot be determined
precisely, ensure that the set cell radius is bigger than the required cell radius. If the configured cell radius exceeds the required cell radius too much, the
processing resource, however, is wasted and the processing delay increases. Based on the data provided by relevant products, the handover synchronization
time increases by a maximum of 60 ms if the cell radius changes its value in increments of 3.75 km. If the set value has a big difference from the actual value,
the handover success rate may be affected.
CAUTION:
When using the RRU, you must set the sum of the cell radius and the fiber transmission delay as the cell radius.
If the access board of the NodeB is configured to support multiple sectors, the maximum configurable cell radius is 30 km.

The setting of the cell radius must be the same as the result of network planning.
Related Commands
Use MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query RADIUS.
Parent topic: Local Cell Management Parameters
Cell Handover Radius

This describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB LMT.
ID
HORAD
Value Range
0 to 180000
Physical Scope
0 m to 180 km, with the step of 1 m
7/18/2011
Page 205 of 205
Setting
The default value is 0. The inner radius of a cell handover radius must be at least 78.125 m, that is, 1 chip, shorter than the cell radius.
You can set and adjust the cell handover radius based on the network planning and network optimization result. In case that the cell handover radius
cannot be determined precisely, ensure that the set cell handover radius is not bigger than the minimum cell handover radius required by the network
planning. If the configured cell handover radius is muchly smaller than the required cell handover radius, the processing delay, however, increases.
CAUTION:
When using the RRU, you must set the cell handover radius to the sum of the actual cell handover radius and the fiber transmission delay.
If the cell handover radius is beyond the cell handover scope that is determined by network planning, the NodeB cannot process the subscribers within the
distance defined by the cell handover radius, and the actual handover scope is smaller than the scope determined by network planning.
Related Commands
Use MOD LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to set and use LST LOCELL (BTS3836, BTS3836A, BBU3836) to query HORAD.
Parent topic: Local Cell Management Parameters
7/18/2011

3G Optimization Referance

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

3G Optimization Referance

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Power Control Parameters

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Power Control Parameters

Uplink Power Control Parameters

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Downlink Power Control Parameters

Parent topic: RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Uplink Power Control Parameters

The parameter is the offset between the power Signaling: 3 dB;

Set: ADD PRACHTFC

Set: ADD PRACHBASIC

Constant value used by a UE to calculate the

Step of the power increase for the preamble

Maximum number of attempts of

Maximum number of preamble loops

To modify PowerOffsetPpm, delete the PRACH,

To modify ConstantValue, delete the PRACH, and

Set: ADD RACH

Query: LST RACH

Constant value used to calculate the initial TX

22, namely -22

Set or modify: SET FRC

Query: LST FRC

MaxAllowedUlTxPower Maximum uplink TX power of a UE

The default value

Use ADD CELLSELRESEL to set, LST

Use ADD CELLCAC to set, use LST CELLCAC

Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part

Parent topic: Power Control Parameters

Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Constant for Calculating the PRACH Initial Transmit Power

Preamble_Initial_Power is the preamble initial transmit power;

Impact on the Network Performance

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Parent topic: Uplink Power Control Parameters

PRACH Power Ramp Step

Maximum Number of Preamble Retransmission Attempts

Maximum Preamble Loop

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

If Mmax is excessively low, the UE access success rate is affected.

Default Constant of DPCCH Transmit Power

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power

. According to the formula, you can infer that:

PUE,max represents the maximum transmit power of a UE.

Downlink Power Control Parameters

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Maximum transmit power of the DPDCH. It relative to

Minimum transmit power of the DPDCH. It is relative to

Refer to List of the maximum and

Power of the primary CPICH of a cell. The reference

330, namely 330 dBm.

Set: ADD PCPICH

MaxPCPICHPower Maximum transmit power of the primary CPICH of a

346, namely 34.6 dBm.

Set: ADD PCPICH

Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

Parent topic: Power Control Parameters

Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link